Henry  &  Emily  Bucher 

Route  #  1 

Black  Earth,  Wise.  53515 


j6t<^M^^- 


-i% 


♦ 


^^  -^-^'-/^^ 


HEADS 


MPONGWE   GRAMMAR; 


CONTAINING 


MOST  OF  THE  PRINCIPLES  NEEDED  BY  A  LEARNER 


BY  A  LATE 


MISSIONARY.    _Jji^^^     /^    V^ 
/^alcpfm    ^Szi/Auc^  (^SoM^  J^iftia^^gd^  ^  U^t^Iii^  €U^ua 


GABOON,    WEST    AFRICA. 


NEW  YORK: 
MISSION    HOUSE,  23    CENTRE    STREET. 

1879. 


CONTENTS. 


FACE 

ORTHOGRAPHY 7 

Elementary  Sounds 9 

Vowels 9 

Diphthongs 9 

Consonants 9 

Orthography  Phonetic 10 

ETYMOLOGY 10 

Gender  and  Denominatives 10 

Number  and  Classification ; 10 

First  Class 10 

Second  and  Third  Classes 11 

Fourth  Class 11 

Note. — iVj/,  Sin.,  changed  to  m,  etc 10 

Nouns  used  only  in  Plural 12 

Verbal  Nouns 13 

First  Class > 12 

Second  Class 13 

Third  Class 13 

Fourth  Class 14 

Nouns  in  Superlative  Degree 14 

Adjectives 14 

Comparison  of 14 

Table  of  Adjectives  and  Nouns 14 

Nouns  used  as  Adjectives 15 

Pronominal  Adjectives 15 

How  Inflected 15 

Fragments  of  Adjectives 16 

Table  of  Compounded  Adjectives 16 

"       Plurals  Compounded 16 

Location  of  Adjective  Pronouns 16 

Table  of  Classes 16 

Terminal  i,  initial  iyam 18 

Table  of  Nouns  and  Adjective  Pronouns 17 

Emphatic  Suffix,  miemS 17 

Demonstrative  Pronouns 18 

Used  in  Interrogations 18 

Numeral  Adjectives 19 

(3) 


CONTENTS. 

Decimal  or  Digital 19 

Used  as  Nouns  19 

Classed  as  Nouns 19 

Table  of  Cardinal  Numbers 19 

Remarks.— Nouns  1st  Class  Singular 20 

Arrangement  of  Nouns  and  Numerals 21 

Abbreviation  of  Numerals 21 

Numbers  become  Nouns,  and  N jun  Numbered  Possessive 21 

Answer  by  sbow  of  Fingers 31 

Adjective  Plirases 21 

Diminutive  ye 21 

Oedinals 22' 

flow  Formed 22 

Fractional  Parts 22 

Pronouns 22 

Personal — No  Gender 22 

Number  aud  Case 22 

Table 23 

Second  Person  Singiilar,  m 23 

Subject  of  iV^e,  Objective 23 

Relative  Pronouns 23 

0,  Singular,  wi,  Plural 23 

Agree  with  Antecedent  in  Number  and  Person 24 

Interrogative  Pronoun 24 

How  Used 24 

Definite  Pronoun . .   25 

Very  Indefinite 25 

Table  of  Class  and  Number 25 

Nominative  Case  changed  to  Objective . .  .*. 25 

Particles 26 

Adverbs  of  Place 36 

"  Time 26 

Verbs  as  Adverbs 26 

Adverbs  of  Manner  and  Cause 37 

Prepositions 27 

Meaning  from  the  Verb 38 

Mr,  ndd,  and  nde 28 

Conjunctions 38 

Copulative  Conjunctions 28 

Disjunctive  "  38 

Interjections 29 

Verbs 29 

Regular  Verbs 29 

Initial,  Consonant,  and  Reciprocal 29 

Root  or  Stem  of  Verb 29 

Table  of  Change  to  Imperative ' 30 

Conjugation  of  Verb 31 

Formation  of  Passive  Voice 31 

I. — Radical  Conjugation    31 

II.— Causative       " 31 


COXTEXTS.  O 

III. — Relative  Conjugatiou 31 

IV.— Frequenttit'e  "           32 

V.-Reflexive        "           32 

VI. — Reciprocal      "           32 

VII.— Indefinite        "           32 

Compound     "           33 

Table  of  Compound  Conjugations S3 

Augments  Parts  of  the  Verbs 34 

Negative,  Active,  and  Passive 34 

"         How  Formed 34 

"         Verbs 34 

Modes— Five 35 

Indicative,  the  Radical 35 

Imperative  Formed 35 

Subjunctive      "       35 

Signs  of  Subjunctive 35 

Potential — Characteristics 36 

Infinitive  Sign  of 36 

Tense,  Number,  and  Person 37 

Imperative  Plural — Number 37 

Immediate  Past  Tense 37 

Paulo  Past              "     37 

Historical                " 37 

Perfect                    "     37 

Pluperfect               "     37 

First  and  Second  Future  Tense 38 

Another,  Nle  be  Tense 38 

Irregular  Verbs 38 

Substantive  Verbs 39 

"               "    Negative 39 

Participles  40 

PARADIGM  OF  REGULAR  VERB 42 

Indicative  Mode 42 

Imperative    "      43 

"           "     Negative 44 

Subjunctive" 45 

"           "     Causative  Conjugation 45 

Potential       "     Radical              "            47 

Infinitive       " 47 

Participle 48 

LIST  OF  ADVERBS  48 

SYNTAX— Nouns 52 

Nouns  and  Adjectives 53 

Verbs 53 

Place  of  Nominative  Case 53 

Verbs  and  Verbs 53 

Passive  Voice 54 

SALUTATIONS 54 

ADIEUS 55 

Mboio,  Adjective  Verbalized 55 


6  CONTENTS. 

ELISION  AND  CHANGE  OE  VOWELS 56 

In  Verbs 56 

In  Nouns 56 

In  Pronominal  Adjectives 57 

EWIRIA— Dakk  Sayings 5t 

GENERAL  REMARKS 58 

Language — How  Cultured 58 

"  How  Preserved 59 

Proverbs 59 


HEADS  OF  THE  MPONGWE  GRAMMAE. 

The  Mpongwe  is  a  dialect  of  one  (tlie  Southern)  of  the  two 
great  families  of  language  spoken  over  the  greater  part  of  the 
continent  of  Africa.  Commencing  at  the  Cameroons  Moun- 
tain and  River  at  the  north-east  corner  of  the  Gulf  of  Guinea, 
this  language  extends  across  the  continent  to  the  Mombas 
country  on  the  east,  and  is  spoken  over  a  great  part  of  Africa 
South.  There  is  five  times  as  much  difference  between  the 
Dualla  language,  spoken  in  Cameruns,  and  the  Efik,  spoken 
in  Old  Calabar,  fifty  miles  west,  as  there  is  between  the  Dualla 
and  the  Zulu-Kafir,  spoken  in  South-eastern  Africa,  near 
three  thousand  miles  away. 

The  Mpongwe,  or  Ayogo  {wise  ones,  as  they  modestly  call 
themselves),  live  on  both  sides  of  the  Gabun  River,  about  a 
haK  degree  north  latitude,  extending  fifty  or  sixty  miles  inte- 
rior. The  Orungu,  about  sixty  miles  south,  and  the  Nkarai 
people  from  eighty  to  one  hundred  miles  beyond,  speak  the 
same  language,  with  a  few  differing  words,  and  a  slight  dif- 
ference of  pronunciation. 

In  the  present  limited  extent  to  which  these  languages,  or 
dialects,  are  known  and  written,  it  would  be  useless  to  attempt 
to  trace  their  relations  and  analogies  ;  and  we,  of  the  present 
day,  can  only  contribute  our  mite  for  the  use  of  the  ones  who 
shall  follow  us  in  the  coming  century.  And  they  will  revel 
in  the  beauties  of  a  language  or  dialects  as  elaborate  in 
structure  and  as  musical  in  tone  as  any  of  the  old  unspoken 
(not  dead)  languages  that  are  the  delight  of  the  scholars  of  the 
present  day.  And  it  is  only  forty  years  since  any  of  these  di- 
alects (with,  perhaps,  one  or  two  exceptions)  had  a  sentence 
written,  or  even  an  alphabet. 

An  outline  grammar  of  the  Mpongwe  language  was  printed 
in  1847",  written  by  Rev.  J.  Leighton  Wilson,  modestly  cred- 

(7) 


8  HEADS    OF   THE   liIPONaWE   GRAilMAK. 

ited  to  the  "Missionaries  of  the  A.  B.  C.  F.  M.,  Gaboon  Mis- 
sion, W.  A."  This  was  written  about  four  years  after  the 
missionaries  first  went  to  Gabun,  and  gives  the  general  prin- 
ciples of  the  language  with  marvelous  accuracy,  after  so  short 
a  study. 

The  present  work  was  commenced  at  the  request  of  a  gen- 
tleman, long  residing  on  the  coast,  as  the  mere  outline  of  the 
grammar,  to  be  printed  in  a  book  which  he  was  writing.  The 
book  has  not  been  published,  and  the  work  has  grown  to  its 
present  dimensions,  and  is  printed  for  the  use  of  the  American 
missionaries  and  others  at  Gabun  and  vicinity. 

After  an  absence  of  more  than  seven  years,  with  no  possi- 
bility of  consulting  a  native  Mpongw^e,  it  is  with  many  mis- 
givings  that  some  of  the  modes  and  tenses  (more  especially 
the  negative  forms)  are  put  forth ;  and  it  is  with  little  hope 
of  perfect  accuracy  that  it  is  now  allowed  to  be  printed. 


OETHOGRAPHY. 

1.  All  the  sounds  in  this  language  can  be  expressed  bj  the 
Eoman  alphabet  with  a  little  moditication.  The  language  has 
been  -written  phonetically,  and  the  letters  are  used  as  follows  : 

VOWELS. 

2.  <i^  as  a  in  far,  tar ;  ^  as  a  in  fall,  tall. 

6  as  e  in  they,  prey ;  c  as  e  in  met,  pet. 
i  as  i  in  machine,  ravine. 
0  as  o  in  note,  mote ;  o  as  o  in  not,  pot. 
u  as  00  in  moon,  soon. 

3.  Diphthongs  ai^  as  in  Krais ;  ao^  as  in  osaon,  a  thing  or  af- 
fair ;  iu  as  in  mpiu,  hot  or  heat ;  ie  as  Angamhic,  God ;  rribiarn- 
bie,  well.  And  these  may  all  be  resolved  into  their  original 
elements  by  prolonging  a  little  the  sound  of  each  letter. 

CONSONANTS   USED    AKE  I 

4.  b,  d,  f,  g  (always  hard),  j,  k,  1,  m,  n,  p,  r,  s,  t,  v,  w,  y,  z, 
e,  h,  q,  and  X  are  not  used.  There  are  also  combinations  of 
consonant  sounds,  as  mh,  mhoni,  goat;  mhoa,  a  dog;  mbw, 
mhwedi,  a  captive ;  omhwiri,  fitish ;  ihp,  as  mpolo,  large ; 
mpunji,  ivoiy  ;  mw,  as  mwera,  scratch.  There  is  also  an  obscure 
combination  of  m  and  w,  as  in  omwa/ri,  written  and  spoken 
omdri,  where  m  and  w  are  resolved  into  m  .•  nd,  as  in  ndego, 
friend ;  ng,  as  in  tigoa,  hog,  ngdwe,  captain ;  nj,  as  in  njicke, 
trouble,  njinla,  gorilla :  nk,  as  in  nkomhe,  sun :  nt,  as  ntzngo^ 
stick :  nty^  as  ntyozyo,  foot,  ntyigo,  chirapasee,  ny,  as  nydnli, 
bird ;  nyowe,  bee :  ngw,  as  ngwe,  mother;  vw,  velia,  imp.  of 
fweliar,  sy,  in  syeva,  to  play,  imp.  syeva,  play  thou  ;  y,  as  yando, 
congregation  ;  ayxianla,  child,  oywanga,  iron  ;  y  has  the  same 
feound  as  ng  in  singer. 

\*  (9) 


10  MPONGWE   GRAMMAR. 

The  combinations,  contractions,  and  coalescences,  for  the 
sake  of  euphony,  are  almost  endless. 

OKTHOGRAPHT. 

5.  The  orthog]-aphy  as  used  in  writing  this  language  is  en- 
tirely phonetic.  No  vowel  has  two  sounds,  and  no  two  vow- 
els are  used  to  represent  the  same  sound,  as  haj  and  they  in  En- 
glish. With  the  exception  of  the  adjective  pronouns,  and  less 
than  a  half  dozen  nouns,  no  word  in  the  language  terminates  with 
a  consonant.  Or,  in  other  words,  with  the  exceptions  named, 
every  word  and  every  syllable  terminates  with  a  vowel  sound. 
There  has  been  no  attempt  made  to  represent  every  shade  of 
sound  in  the  language,  for  this  would  cumber  the  alphabet. 

ETYMOLOGY. 

6.  There  are  eight  parts  of  speech  in  the  Mpongwe  lan- 
guage, the  same  as  in  English :  noun,  pronoun,  adjective, 
verb,  adverb,  preposition,  conjunction,  and  interjection. 

NOUNS. 

Y.  l!Touns  have  number  and  classification,  but  no  case  end- 
ing or  gender. 

Case  is  known  as  it  is  in  English. 

Gender  is  expressed  by  suffixing  the  word  man  or  woman, 
as  o^wdnlome,  child-man,  or  boy ;  0)j-wanto,  child-woman,  or 
girl ;  nyare-nyanto,  cow ;  nyare-nome,  bull :  the  denomina- 
tives calf,  lamb,  kid  by  prefixing  the  word  child  to  the  noun ; 
a,s  or^wd-nyare,  child  of  a  cow  ;  oyw-iddmbe,  child  of  a  sheep ; 
oywd-mhoni^  child  of  a  goat. 

NUMBER   AND   CLASSIFICATION. 

8.  The  Mpongwe  nouns  may  be  arranged  in  four  classes, 
distinguished  by  the  manner  of  forming  the  plural  of  each. 

Number  is  expressed  on  the  initial  syllable  of  the  noun. 

First  Class. 

9.  This  class  embraces  all  those  nouns  which  commence 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


11 


with  a  consonant  sound  (written  with  one  or  more  consonants) 
and  form  their  plurals  by  prefixing  i  or  si  to  the  singular. 


Goat, 

House, 

Gorilla, 


mhoni^  irriboni  or  sinibofii- 

nago,  inago  or  sinago. 

njinla,  injinla  or  sinjinla. 

Second  Class.   ■ 


10.  This  class  embraces  all  those  nouns  having  e  for  their 
initial  syllable,  and  forms  the  plurals  by  dropping  this  letter ; 
thus; 

SINGirLAK.  PLUEAIi. 

Head,  ewonjo,  wonjo. 

Boat,  elende,  lende. 

Chest,  egara,  gara. 

Note  . — If  the  first  consonant  of  the  word  be  z,  in  forming  the 
plural  e  is  dropped,  and  the  2  is  changed  to  y  ;  thus : 


Book, 

Thing, 
Broom, 


SINGULAB. 

ezango, 
ezdma, 
ezdrribdld, 

Third  Glass. 


PLURAL. 

yango. 
ydma. 
ydnibdld. 


11.  This  class  embraces  all  those  nonns  which  have  o  for 
their  initial  letter ;  and  they  form  their  plurals,  first,  by  chang- 
ing 0  into  i ;  second,  by  changing  o  into  a  /  third,  by  chang- 
ing 0  into  si. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

1.  River.  oldvi,  ildvi. 
Basket,  otondo,  Hondo. 

2.  Arm,  ogd.  agd. 
Canoe,  owaro,  ama/ro. 

3.  Feather,  owowa,  sihowa. 
Shoulder,  ovega^  silega. 

Song,  oweinbo,  ijerribo  or  sijemho. 

Leaf,  owavi,  ijavi  or  sijavi. 

Hair,  orue.  itue  or  situe. 


12  MPONGWE    GKAMMAE, 

Note  1. — ^To  this  class  belongs  a  large  number  of  nouns  used 
only  in  the  singular;  asombu,  ashes;  ompimga,  wind;  oyioei^  breath. 

Note  2. — -Abstract  verbal  nouns  also  belong  to  the  plural  of  the 
third  division  of  this  class.  They  take  the  initial  letters  si  or  i, 
usually  the  latter,  as  pakiHa,  to  begin;  ipakilia,  the  begining; 
benda,  to  hate;  ibeiida,  hatred;  tonda,  to  love;  itunda,  love,  si  in 
these  verbal  nouns  is  used  for  emphasis ;  as  ejdgd,  he  is  sick ;  are 
nla  sijdgd,  he  is  very  sick. 

Fourth  Class. 
12.  This  class  embraces  all  nouns  having  i  for  their  initial 
in  the  singular,  and  forming  their  plurals  by  changing  i  into 
a,  thus: 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

Sheep,  iddmbe,  admnhe. 

Stone,  ido,  ado. 

Banana,  itdta,  atdtd. 

Note  1. — If  the  first  two  consonants  in  the  singular  be  ny,  the 
ny  is  changed  to  m  ;  if  the  first  consonant  be  v,  the  v  is  changed 
in  the  plural  to  mp ;  if  it  be  w,  the  w  is  changed  to  mb. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Post, 

inyengd, 

atnengd. 

Poison, 

inyemba, 

ameniba. 

Law, 

ivanga. 

ampa/nga. 

Wing, 

ivava., 

ampava. 

Jaw, 

iwugu, 

ambugu. 

Breast, 

ivenle, 

amhenle. 

Note  2.— To  this  belong  many  nouns  used  only  in  the  plural,  usu- 

ally the  names  of  liquids,  thus :  anlingo, 

water;  a/w^w,  rum;  agali, 

oil;  aka,  sap;  ampuni, 

foam;  amenje,  peace. 

VERBAL  NOUNS. 

13.  Verbal  nouns  belong  to  all  the  four  classes  of  noun  a 
above,  and  are  arranged  according  to  the  order  of  those 
classes,  to  which  also  they  are  to  be  refered. 

Class  First. 
Yerbals  of  this  class  are  usually  formed  by  prefixing  n  to 
tlie  ground  form  of  the  verb;   thus,  ntango,  number,  from 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  13 

tanga,  to  count,  nharabinli,  manner  of  speaking,  from  Icamha, 
to  speak.  When  the  verb  has  h  or  p  for  the  mitial  consonant, 
it  forms  this  class  of  nouns  by  prefixing  m  to  the  ground  form 
of  the  verb.  Euphonic  concord  will  be  noted  here,  h  and  j» 
are  labials,  and  tlie  prefix  must  be  the  same,  inbohinli,  man- 
ner of  barking,  from  hoha,  to  bark  ;_  mhoginli,  manner  of 
shouting,  from  loginla,  to  make  a  disturbance ;  mjpandinlo, 
ladder,  from  panda^  to  ascend. 

Others  are  formed  from  the  imperative  of  the  verb,  nyiiili- 
nlo,  a  dream,  from  yiMinlo,  dream  thou ;  nyenibi,  a  song,  from 
yemba,  sing  thou. 

Note. — There  is  no  rule  apparent  for  using  the  ground  form  in 
one  verb,  and  the  imperative  in  another,  as  above  and  below. 

Second  Class. 

14.  Nonns  of  this  class  are  formed  by  prefixing  e  to  the 
ground  form  of  the  verb,  thus  : 

Ekamhia,  interpreter,  fi'om  hamba,  to  speak. 

Edingo^  crying,  from  diriga,  to  cry,  mourn. 

Eboli,  fist,  from  hola,  to  strike. 

Or,  from  the  imperative,  thus : 

Egenliso,  a  measure,  from  genliza,  measure  thou. 

Eromi,  a  messenger,  from  roma,  send  thou. 

Eyenlo,  mirror,  from  yenla,  see  thou. 

Third  Class. 

15.  This  class  is  formed  by  prefixing  o  to  the  imperative  of 
the  verb ;  the  terminal  vowel,  like  the  other  classes,  is  changed 
variously,  but  sometimes  not  at  all. 

Ogenda,  a  stranger,  from  genda,  travel  thou. 
Ogomba,  a  fence,  from  gomba,  enclose  thou. 
Oyi7ilo,  a  dance,  from  yinla,  dance  thou. 
Ozyiwo,  punishment,  from  zyiioa,  punish,  or  whip. 

Some  from  the  ground  form  of  the  verb,  thus : 
OTcugi,  pauper,  from  Tciiga,  to  become  poor. 
Oteihu,  simpleton,  from  tema,  to  act  foolishly. 


14  MPONGWE   OEAMMAE. 

For  abstract  nouns  see  note  under  the  third  division  of 
the  third  class  of  nouns.  They  belong  to  the  plural  of  this 
class  of  verbal  nouns. 

Fourth  Class. 

16.  Nouns  of  this  class  are  formed  by  prefixing  *  to  the 
imperative  of  the  verb,  and  forming  the  plural  after  the  fourth 
class  of  nouns. 

Igamba,  a  word,  from  gamha,  speak. 
Ivenda,  greatness,  from  venda,  become  great. 
Inyomanlo,  contention,  from  yomanla^  contend. 

There  are  also  nouns  in  the  superlative  degree,  formed  by 
reduplicating  the  noun,  expressing  the  highest  degree  of 
greatness  or  excellence. 

Anloinenloihie,  anloine,  men,  chief  est  men. 
A7itoantwe,  anto,  women,  chief  est  women. 
Igooiligonloe,  igonlo,  on  high,  most  high. 
Ongulunguhime,  ngiilh\  strength,  Almighty. 
Orundoru7idiej  orunda,  sacred,  Most  Holy. 

Each  of  the  foregoing  may  be  used  in  the  singular  or  plural. 

ADJECTIVES. 

17.  The  Mpongwe  language  is  poor  in  adjectives,  and  the 
few  in  use  have  no  regular  degrees  of  comparison.  There  is 
a  form  of  comparison,  not  much  used,  and  perhaps  not  author- 
ized fully.  Mhia.,  good  ;  mhia  Icwe,  better ;  mbia  me,  best. 
Comparison  is  often  expressed  by  the  use  of  words,  and  even 
phrases  and  circumlocutions.  Viaganlu,  from  piaganla, 
to  surpass,  to  excel,  is  much  used.  Posyo^  more  than.  Em- 
phasis is  also  used  to  express  comparison,  but  is  necessarily 
very  indefinite. 

18.  Adjectives  of  themselves  have  neither  class  or  numbers, 
but  receive  these  from  the  nouns  with  which  they  arc  used. 

1st  Class,  Sin. — nago  Tnhia,  house  good. 
"      ^'/ 1    Plu. — sinago  simhia,  houses  good. 


ORTHOGBAPHY.  15 

2d  Class,  Sin. — erer''  evia,  tree  good. 

"  "  Flu. — rere  via,  trees      " 

3d  "  Sin. — ogulu  omhia,  rope  good. 

"  "  Pin. — ingulu  imhia,  ropes  " 

"  "  2d  Sin. — ogd  ombia^  arm      " 

"  "  "  Plu. — agd  amhia,  arms   " 

"  "  3d  Sin. — owavi  otnbiay  leaf  good. 

"  "  "   F\u.—Sij(wisihia,     "       " 

4tli  "  Sin. — igamb'  ivia,  word  good. 

"  "  Plu. — agamh'  ambia,  words  good. 

19.  There  is  a  class  of  nouns  which  are  used  as  adjectives 
by  taking  the  vinculum  of  the  definite  pronoun  to  conform 
them  to  the  number  and  class  of  the  nouns  which  they  follow 
and  qualify. 

1st  Class,  Sin. — JVago  yapiipu,  house  of  whiteness. 

"  "  Plu. — sinago  sajpupu,  houses  of  whiteness. 

2d  "  Sin. — elende  zatenlatenla,  boat  of  redness. 

"  "  Plu. — lende  yatenlatenla,  boats  of  redness. 

3d  "  Sin. — ogclli  loi-ngulu,  twine  of  strength. 

"  "  Plu. — igdli  yi-ngulu,  twines  of  strength. 

4th     "  Sin. — ilasa  ny-onligi,  orange  of  sweetness. 

"  "  Plu. — alasa  m-onligi,  oranges  of  sweetness. 

"  "  Sin. — itdtd  nyantimtu,  the  whole  banana. 

"  "  Plu. — apaki  mavidvid,  caps  of  blackness. 

"  "         "       Aha  mi-nonli,  sap  of  bitterness. 

"  "         "       Anlmgo,  mi  Tnjyiu,  water  of  heat. 

The  above  table  does  not  pretend  to  exhaust  the  list  of  sub- 
stantive adjectives,  neither  does  it  appear  why  the  definite 
pronoun  unites  so  differently  with  different  woi'ds. 

PEONOMIlSrAL   ADJECTIVES. 

20.  These  are  inflected  in  nearly  the  same  manner  as  the 
preceding.  The  roots  or  stems  of  these  adjective  pronouns 
are  as  follows : 

Sin. — am  my,  d  your,  e  his. 

Plu. — azyo  ours,  ani  yours,  ao  theirs. 


16 


MPONGWE  GKAMMAE. 


The  fragments  of  definite  pronouns  with  which  these  are 
compounded  for  nse,  and  which  inflect  them  to  agree  with  the 
different  classes  of  nouns,  are  as  follows  : 

1st  Class,  Sin. — y.        Flu. —  s  or  si. 
2d       "       "      z.  "       y. 

3d       "       "      w. 
dth     "      "       ny 


m. 


The  adjective  pronouns  compounded  are  as  follows  : 


1st  Class  . 

Sin. 
Flu. 

ydw,  ray 
sajn     " 

?/«  yom 

ye  his. 

2d      "      . 

Sin. 

za7n    " 

s^      " 

ze    " 

3d      "      '. 

Flu. 

Sin. 

yam    " 
^oaon  " 

2/a     " 

a        a 

4th    "      ! 

a        a 

Fin. 
Sin. 
Flu. 

yam    " 
nyam  " 

ijd  ^   " 
m4    " 

Wy(3  " 

mc  " 

PLURAL    FOKM    OF    ADJECTIVE   PRONOUNS. 

Ist  Class  . 

Sin. 
Flu. 

yazyo  our.  yatili  your.  ^ 
sazyo     "    sanli     " 

yao  their. 

2d      " 

Sin. 

zazyo     " 

sa?^?^     " 

zao      " 

3d      " 

-   •      • 

Flu. 
Sin. 

yazyo     " 
icazyo    " 

yanli     " 
wanli    " 

it        a 
4t]i     " 

a       a 

Flu. 
Sin. 
Flu. 

yazyo    " 
nyazyo  " 
riiazyo   " 

nyanli  " 
manli    " 

ijao      " 
nyao    " 
mao     " 

21.  The  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun  usually  stands  next 
after  the  noun  which  it  qualifies.  The  following  table  will 
better  show  the  relation  of  adjective  pronoun^  to  the  nouns 
which  they  qualify,  than  any  descrijDtion : 


NOUNS. 

MY. 

THY. 

HIS. 

1st  Class  .... 

Town 

Sin. 

nhali 

yam 

yd 

ye 

u        u 

a 

Flu. 

inJ^ali 

sam 

sa 

S6 

2d      "      .... 

Chest 

Sin. 

cqar^ 

zam, 

za 

ze 

u        u 

a    . 

Plu. 

gari 

yam 

^y^L- 

ye 

OETHOGEAPHY. 


17 


NOTTNS. 

MT. 

Tar. 

HIS. 

3d  Class  .... 

Yine 

Sin. 

ogdli 

loam 

wd 

WO 

a         a 

ii 

Flu. 

igdli 

yam 

ya 

ye 

u           ii 

x\rm,  2d 

Sin, 

ogd 

warn 

wa 

we 

a         a 

ii       ii 

Pin. 

agd 

mam 

ma 

me 

a         a 

Leaf    3d 

Sin. 

oioavi 

warn 

wa 

we 

a         u 

ii   .    ii 

Plu. 

sijavi 

sam, 

sa 

so 

4th     " 

Forest 

Sin. 

i'gi 

nyawj 

nya 

nye 

U            ii 

a 

Plu. 

agi 

mam. 

md 

me 

Note. — ^Most  of  the  nouns  in  this  table  end  properly  in  a,  and 
after  the  common  manner  of  writing  the  a  is  changed  to  i.  (But 
the  probability  is  that  the  terminal  a  should  be  elided,  and  i  pre- 
fixed to  the  adjective  pronoun,  as:  iyam.,  iyd,  iye.      "T, ,  . .  t  >v«rt.  tji  ^., 

22.  Table  of  plural  form  of  adjective  pronouns,  as  used  with 
the  nouns  which  they  qualify : 


NOUN. 

OUR. 

YOUR. 

THEIB. 

1st  Class. 

Town 

Sin. 

nhali 

yazyo 

yanli 

yao 

u 

ii 

Plu. 

inhaH 

sa~yo 

mnli 

sao 

2d 

Chest 

Sin. 

egari 

zazyo 

zaftl'h 

zao 

u 

ii 

Plu. 

gari 

yazyo 

yanli 

yao 

3d 

Twine 

Sin. 

ogdli 

inmyo 

waoili 

wao 

ii 

Vine 

Plu. 

igdli 

yazyo 

yanli 

yao 

ii 

"      2d. 

Ann 

Sin. 

ogd 

wazyo  . 

wanli 

wao 

ii 

((          a 

ii 

Pi-:. 

aga    ■ 

masyo 

manJi 

mao 

a 

"      3d. 

Biscuit 

Sin. 

o'eqi 

icazyo 

wanli  ■ 

wao 

ii 

ii       ii 

ii 

Plu. 

ndeqi 

sazyo 

sanli 

sao 

4th 

Forest 

Sin. 

Ujh    , 

nyazyo 

ny  lal'i 

nyao 

Plu. 

agi 

ni.a.zyo 

mxinli 

mao 

a 

Branches 

Plu. 

'impare 

mnzyo 

manli 

mao 

Ther.e 


:i  is  an  emphatic  suffix  to  the  pronoun  and  ihe  adjec- 
tive pronoun  alike ;  me^  mieme,  myself ;  awsme,  yourself ; 
ayeme,  himself;    azurocme,  ourselves;  'arolueme,  yourselves; 


mi%  inemseives.     The  same  suffix  is  to  the  adjective  pro- 
is,  thus,  yamime^  my  own ;  samiTne,  plu.,  my  own.     All 
the  persons  the  sam3. 


waome,  themselves 
noun 


18 


MPONGWE   GRAMMAR. 


DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS. 


23.  These  are  of  two  classes,  yinld,  this ;  and  yanla^  or 
meydnld,  that. 

The  following  table  will  show  the  classification  to  be  the 
same  as  the  adjective  pronoun : 


1st  Class 
2d      " 
8d      " 
4th     " 


Foot      Sin.  ntyozyo  yinla 
Basket     "    otondo    \winld 
Chest       "    egai^a     \zinld 
Eye  "    intyd      nyinla 


sinld 
yinld 
yinld 
rainld 


Ist  Class 
2d      " 
3d      " 
4th     " 


Hammer 
Head 
Fruit 
Oranofe 


'^mMityolo 
^eioo7ijo 
olonda 
ilasa 


meydnld 
mezdnld 
mhvdnld 
menydnld 


m£sdnld 
jYieydnld 
meydnld 
mhndnld 


These   definite   or  demonstrative   adjective   pronouns  are 
more  frequently  used  in  an  interrogative  sentence,  thus : 


Njali 

Gun 

yinld 

this 

yamande  ? 

whose  ? 

lyd. 

yours. 

Eere 

Trees 

yinld 

these 

yamande  t 

whose  ? 

iyam. 

mine. 

Aha        minld        im,d ; 

Mangoes        those             yours 

ndo 

but 

7nemdnld.         irne. 

those                   his. 

Oumtanga 

Ship 

mewdnld 

that 

we? 

what? 

loi 
of 

JSfgesh. 

English. 

Elcnde 

Bout 

mcsdnld 

that 

zef 
what? 

zi 
of 

Mpongwe. 

Mpongwe. 

Ndaga 

Affiiir 

nde 
what 

yinld  f 

this? 

AzUfiOpa  mia. 

We  do  not  know. 

Elendinta 

Bow 

nde        mezdnld  ? 

what  kind.              that? 

zi 
of 

Bafan. 

Pa2;wes. 

Esa 

Thing 

nde         mezdnld  ? 

what               that? 

Igdiiga  nyWkeli. 

a  spear  of  a  Bakele. 

VW 


OBTHOGKAPHT. 


19 


In  the  first  two  of  the  above  sentences,  mande  f  is  the  in- 
terrogative word.  In  the  fifth,  we  f  ;  in  the  sixth,  ze  f  ;  and 
in  the  last  three,  nde  ? 

NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 

24.  The  manner  of  counting  is  decimal  or  digital  (counting 
always  with  their  fingers)  to  ten,  and  then  reduplicating. 
They  have  no  abbreviated  words  like  twenty,  thirty,  forty, 
but  number  the  tens  thus :  two  tens,  three  tens,  four  tens. 
The  numerals  are  sometimes  used  as  nouns,  and  the  first  five 
are  in  the  first  class  of  nouns.  The  last  five  are  more  fre- 
quently used  as  nouns,  thus :  Orowa  winld,  this  six ;  ordr 
genlo  mewdnla^  that  seven.  Six  and  seven  are  of  the  third 
class.  Enenlai  zinld^  this  eight ;  enldgomi  mhdnld,  that 
nine.  And  eight  and  nine  are  of  the  second  class.  Ten 
igomi,  plu.  agomi,  is  of  the  fourth  class,  forming  its  plural  in 
the  same  manner,  and  taking  numerals  after  the  same  form. 
Nhama^  one  hundred,  is  in  the  1st  class  of  nouns,  and  takes 
numerals  as  other  nouns  of  that  class;  nlcama  rribanli,  two 
hiuidred  ;  nlcama  ntyaro,  three  hundred.  For  thousand  they 
have  no  word,  but  have  talisn  the  English,  calling  it  ntausen, 
when  speaking  their  own  language.  This  word  also  belongs 
to  the  first  class  of  nouns. 


'1st  class. 


CARDINAL   NUMBERS. 
2d  class.  3d  class.  4th  class. 


1.  mclri  Effyi^i  Ofn^i 

2.  onbanli        vanli  imbanli- 

3.  ntyaro        rarp  iraro 

4.  n^ai  r^ai  inlai 

5.  ntyanli       tanli  itanli 

6.  orowa,  indeclinable,  invariable. 
T.  ordgenlo,       "  " 

8.  enei^ai,         "  " 

9.  enldgomi,     "  " 

10.  igomi,  plu.  agomi. 

11.  igoyni  nVirndri,  ten  and  one. 

12.  igomi  nli  vahli,  ten  and  two. 


ambanli. 
araro. 
anlai, 
atanli. 


c^ 


20 


MPONGWE   GRAJVIMAR 


IST  CLASS. 

2l>  CLASS. 

3d  class.               4th  class. 

13.  igomi 

nViranro. 

14.  igomi 

nVanlai. 

15.  igomi 

nVatanli. 

16.  igomi 

nVorowa. 

11.  igomi 

nVordgenlo. 

18.  igomi 

nlmenlai. 

19.  igom^i 

nVenlagom. 

20.  agomi 

amhanli. 

21.  agomi 

ambanli^  nl 

^imdri. 

22.  agomi 

amhanli 

nVambanli. 

30.  agomi 

araro. 

31.  agomi 

araro.  nVimdri,  tens,  three  and  one. 

40.  agomi 

anlai,  tens, 

four. 

44.  agomi 

«;iZ(aj^ 

*iZ^  wa^'. 

50.  agomi 

atanli. 

60.  agomi 

orowa. 

70.  agomi 

ordgenlo. 

80.  agomi 

m?m?a^. 

90.  agomi 

enldgomi. 

100.  Nhamia, 

1st  Class.  -  M 

.^ojra<!i.^ .a-i^  K'U.;<i    t^    5^< 

110.  JVkama 

nV  igomi. 

112.  JVkama 

nVigomi 

nlivanli. 

120.  nkama 

nVagomi 

amhanli. 

1000.  ntausen, 

1st  Class. 

n  fAics-fvc 

.      :^     -^CVO' 

EEMARKS. 

26.  Kouns  of  the  First  Class,  when  followed  by  a  numeral, 
are  used  only  in  the  singular  number,  thus :  7i(?^^  ntya/)'o, 
house  three ;  nyilu  ntyanli^  anchor  live.  To  nine  the  nu- 
meral stands  next  after  the  noun  which  it  numbers.  Yango 
vanli^  books  two;  aTcdndd  enenlai,  plantains  eight;  igomi 
(ten)  with  its  plural  agomi^  uniformly  precedes  the  noun 
which  it  numbers,  thus :  igomi  nyimhonli,  ten  of  goats ; 
agom^i  rrCaddmhe  amhanli^  tens  of  sheep  two. 

Nyi.,  a  form  of  the  definite  pronoun,  uniformly  comes  be- 
tween igomi  and  the  noun  following,  dropping  its  vowel  when 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  21 

the  following  noun  begins  with  a  vowel,  thus :  igomi  nya- 
ddmle,  ten  of  sheep. 

The  plural  of  ten,  agomi,  brings  the  vinculum  in  the  same 
manner,  thus : 

agomi  ■manlag'^  anlai  nVanlag''  atanli. 

tens        of  people        four    and  people        five. 

Abbreviated  thus  :  agomi  anlai  nVanlag''  atanli. 

tens       four        and  people  five. 

So  as  they  ascend  in  numbering,  they  condense  ; 

ICO  3  lO's         ^  6 

nkaina  s'anlaga  ntyaro  nV agomi  ni'anl'Xg^  orowa  nVanlaga 

8 

enlenlai.     Abbreviated  thus : 

nltam.a  ntyaro  nl"* agomi  orowa  nVanlaga  enlenlai. 

hundred  tbree  and  tons  six  and  people  eight. 

They  frequently  abbreviate  in  this  manner :  inyare  ata,nli., 
cattle  fives,  tens  being  understood ;  because  inyare  and  atanli 
can  not  be  construed  together;  but  agomi.,  tens,  does  agree 
with  atanli,  and  the  mind  instantly  takes  it  thus :  agomi 
rrCinyare  atanli.^  tens  of  cattle  five.  In  these  cases  the  hun- 
dreds and  tens  become  nouns,  and  the  noun  numbered  takes 
the  definite  pronoun  and  comes  into  the  possessive  c.ise  ;  un- 
less you  call  the  articulation  a  prepositipn,  and  then  the  noun 
is  in  the  objective  case. 

Again,  a  person  asks,  al'dndd  memdnld  mi  re  ntango  se? 
Plantains  those  are  what  number  ?  The  person  interrogated 
holds  up,  say,  eight  fingers,  and  replies,  mo  minld,  they  are 
these.     The  first  person  answers,  enlenlai,  eight. 

The  want  of  adjectives  in  this  Janguage  is  supplied  by 
phrases,  thus :  are  juwa  pa,  he  is  he  died,  or  he  is  dead :  e 
jdgd  yanla,  he  hears  hunger:  ejenV  esyove,  he  sees  thirst. 
The  few  adjectives  are  used  with  much  latitude  of 'meaning. 
Participles  are  considered  in  their  own  place.  Ye  is  prefixed 
to  some  nouns  to  express  a  few,  thus :  ye  ydma,  a  few  things ; 
ye  nyare,  a  few  cattle ;  y'addmhe,  few  sheep.  •  And  this  may 
be  a<-contraction  from  the  following,  or  the  following  may  be 
a  compound  from  it ;   sinago  sinyewd,  a  few  houses ;  gara 


22 


MPONGWE   GRAMMAR. 


yewd,  a  few  chests  ;   inlaTnlJ'  imiewd,  few  cloths ;   addnibc 
am<ewd,  a  few  sheep. 

ORDINALS. 

27.  These  are  formed  by  prefixing  the  definite  pronoun  to 
the  number,  or  inserting  it  between  the  noun  and  the  numeral ; 
thus,  nago  y-imhanli,  house  of  two,  or  second  house ;  egara 
zi  raro,  chest  of  three,  or  third  chest ;  ofnenlo  wHnlai,  fourth 
finger ;  iddmhe  ny'enlenlai,  eighth  sheep  ;  ilasa  ny'^atanli^ 
fifth  orange. 

There  is  no  word  for  half  except  erenli,  a  cutting,  from 
tenia,  to  cut ;  erenl '  evolo,  a  large  cutting,  more  than  half ; 
erenV  ezango,  small  cutting,  less  than  half ;  otenle  is  also 
used.  Anlingo  mi  re  se  go  Tculu  f  how  is  the  water  in 
the  pail  ?  3£i  r  otenle,  it  is  half.  Eyare  is  another  word 
meaning  a  splitting,  jarua,  to  split,  and  used  the  same  as 
erenli.  Mhei,  a  piece,  is  used  nearly  in  the  same  way.  And 
these  are  all  nouns. 

PRONOUNS. 

28.  The  Mpongwe  language  is  rich  in  pronouns,  and,  tak- 
ing various  fonns  according  to  the  four  declensions  of  nouns 
(singular  and  plural)  for  which  they  stand  instead,  they  can 
be  used  with  a  definiteness  found  in  few  lansruao^es  which  are 
not  cognate,  and  constructed  in  nearly  the  same  manner. 
Thei-e  are  three  kinds  of  pronouns — Personal,  Relative  and 
Definite. 

PERSONAIi   PRONOUNS. 

29.  These  have  no  gender,  but  have  person,  number  and 
case.  The  following  table  will  exhibit  most  of  the  forms  of 
personal  pronouns : 


Singular. 

Pltteai.. 

Nominative. 

Object. 

Nom. 

Object. 

1st  Person    .     . 
2d        "... 

3d        "... 

mi 

0,  om,  awe 

e,  aye 

mie 
d 

ye,  e 

azue 

anlue 

wi 

asue 
anlue 
wao 

OKTHOGEAPHY.  23 

For  the  emphatic  suffix  to  these,  see  under  adjective  pro- 
nouns. 

Note  1. — The  first  and  second  persons  plural  are  the  same  in 
the  nominative  and  objective  eases.  The  probability  is  that  in 
the  third  person  singular  e  is  the  root  of  the  objective  case.  And 
no  pronoun  ending  with  e  is  ever  used  as  the  direct  subject  of  a 
verb,  unless  standing  next  after  it,  and  usually  incorporated 
with  it. 

Note  2. — The  m  in  the  second  person  singular  is  used  only  to 
make  a  euphonic  concord  when  o  would  come  next  to  a  in  the 
verb,  and  thus  avoid  the  coalescence  of  the  two  vowels  or  the 
suppression  of  either;  as,  o  akamba,  you  have  spoken;  here  o  is 
the  nominative  to  the  verb,  and  a  forms  the  immediate  past  tense. 
Both  must  be  preserved;  but  the  harshness  of  speaking  both  sep- 
arately must  be  avoided;  so  the  m,  a  mere  breathing,  is  put  in  to 
bridge  the  hiatus,  om  akamba. 

Note  3.— When  the  personal  pronoun  of  either  the  first,  second, 
or  third  person  is  used  as  the  subject  of  the  substantive  verb  nle, 
to  be,  it  invariably  takes  the  form  of  the  objective  case,  thus: 

OmCi  doanla  vcivd  nle  mie, 

The  person  who  lives  there  is  me. 

Omd  be  kenda  gogo  nle  we, 
The  person  who  will  go  there    is    you. 

Oma  mewdnld  inande  ?  nle  ye, 

The  person  that        who  ?      it  is  him. 

Note. — Almost  any  irregularity  of  construction  throws  the  nom- 
inative case  into  the  objective  form,  and  puts  it  after  the  verb. 

The  relative  pronoun  o,  who,  in  the  above  sentences,  coalesces 
with  final  a  in  oma,  into  d. 

KELATIVE   pronouns. 

30.  The  relative  pronoun  in  the  singular  is  o,  and  in  the 
plural  wi,  when  relating  to  persons  ;  and  when  no  question  is 
asked,  thus : 

VeW  onlome  o  Jcenda  vdvd, 

Cal]  the  man  who  goes  there. 

Ganiba  nVowanto  o  re  go  nago^ 

Speak  with  the  woniau  who  is  in  the  house, 

J/'5e  Jcamha  nVanlaga  loi  re  g'owa7'o, 

I  will  speak  with  the  people  who  are  in  the  canoe. 


24  MPONGWE   GRAMMAK. 

When  an  appellative  or  other  noun  stands  for  the  antece- 
dent, the  relative  pronoun  must  agree  with  it  in  declension 
or  class  and  number,  thus  : 

Heri  yasyo  yi  re  gorowa, 

Father  our  who  is  in  heiven. 

Ge  syuge  mhonli  yi  nye  ntogolo, 

Go  scare  the  goat  which  eats  the  pepper. 

Yag''  inkavi  si  rs  gw^elende, 

Bring  the  oars  which  are  in  the  boat. 

Nlunf  egara  zi  re  nVilamiha^  rw 

Shut  tlie  cliest  which  has  the  cloth. 

Got^  ingozyo  si  liairiba  vdvd, 

Catch  the  parrots  which  are  talking  there. 

3fi  tia  ogitla  wi  singa  vdvd,, 

I  fear  the  tornado  wliich  roars  there. 

JE  heV  Honda  yi  re  gw'erere  mezd. 

He  wants  the  fruits  which  are  on  that  tree. 

Azue  peiiginV  arfiaro  mi  Ma  nlenld^ 

We  wait  the  canoes  which  come  to-day. 
INTEEROGATIVE   PEONOUN. 

31.  Mande  f  who  ?  is  used  when  refemug  to  persons,  or 
when  asking  a  person's  name,  either  of  himself,  or  of  a  third 
person. 

Awe  mande  ?  who  are  you  ?  Aye  mande  ?  who  is  he  ? 

Ini  nyd  mande  ?  what  is  your  name  ? 

Ijii  nye  mande  f  name  his  what  ? 

Nago  meyd  ya  mande  ?  house  that  of  whom  ? 

Wa  mande  is  the  plnral  form,  and  is  sometimes  nsed  at 
the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  sometimes  at  its  close,  thus  : 

Wi  he  panda  go  nkala  wa  mande,,  or  mande  f 

Those  who  will  ascend  to  the  town         who  ? 

Wa  mande  samho  wi  he  tig  aula  gw'elende  f 

Who  therefore  will  remain  in  the  hoat  ? 

Note  1 . — The  plural  here  is  to  be  distinguished  from  the  pos- 
sessive case  singular,  as  follows : 

•M  Oytoanla  mewdnld  loa  mande  f 

Child  that       whose,  or  of  v/hora  ? 


OKTHOGRAPHT. 


25 


Note  2. — The  vowel  e,  with  its  inflecting  consonants,  is  used  as 
a  distinguishing  interrogative,  and  always  follows  the  noun,  thus: 
Ifago  ye  ?  which  house  ?  egomhe  zye  f    What  time  ? 
Owaro  we  ?  which  canoe  ?  izyage  nye  ?  which  duck  ? 


DEFINITE   PRONOUN. 


32.  The  term  definite  is  used  for  want  of  a  better  defini- 
tion, for  nothing  can  be  more  indefinite  than  this  little  serv- 
ant of  all  work,  in  some  of  its  uses.  It  is  sometimes  a  per- 
sonal, sometimes  a  relative  pronoun.  Sometimes  it  is  a  preposi- 
tion (of)  or  the  sign  of  the  possessive  case.  It  stands  entire, 
it  coalesces,  it  drops  its  own  vowel  (or  being)  to  make  a  eu- 
phonic concord  ;  and  in  almost  every  case,  bj  its  consonants, 
it  makes  the  alliteral  concord ;  which  is  one  of  the  peculiar 
features  of  the  Mpongwe  language  and  its  cognates. 

The  following  table  will  show  the  classification  of  this  pro- 
noun, and  its  correspondence  to  the  nouns  in  class  and  number  : 


Singular. 

Plubal. 

Nom. 

Pos. 

Obj. 

Nom. 

Pos. 

Obj. 

1st  Class .  . 
2d      "     .  . 
3d      "     .  . 
4th    "     .  . 

nyi 

ya,  or  y' 

za,  or  s' 
wa,  or  ?/;' 
nya,  or  ny"" 

yo 

so 

wo 

nyo 

si 
yi 

y\ 

mi 

sa,  or  s' 
ya,  or  y' 
ya,  or  y 
ma,  or  W 

80 

yo 

yo 
mo 

Note  1. — The  a  in  the  possessive  case  is  used  only  before  nouns 
commencing  with  a  consonant,  for  euphony. 

Note  2. — The  nominative  case  stands  immediately  before  the 
verb,  or  after  it,  and  in  the  latter  case  takes  the  objective  form. 

Note  3. — The  nominative  case  is  changed  to  the  objective  form 
•when  anything  very  definite  or  emphatic  is  to  be  expressed,  and 
still  retains  the  place  of  the  nominative  before  the  verb.  This 
occurs  more  frequently  when  the  verb  is  in  the  passive  voice. 

Ngozyo  meydnld  yo  tdndo  nde. 

Parrot  that        it   is  loved  by  him. 

Oioaro  mewanld  wome  w'akdmhizo  zuwe, 

Cauoe       that  one      itself       it  was  chased  hy  us. 
2 


26  MPONGWE  GEAMMAK. 

PAKTICLES. 

33.  The  Mpongwe,  like  the  English,  has  four  parts  of 
speech  called  particles — the  Adverb,  the  Preposition,  the 
Conjunction,  and  the  Interjection. 

ADTEEBS    OF   PLACE. 

34.  vH-vsnld,  are  vH,  he  is  here ;  wi  re  venld,  they  are  here. 
gun^  or  gunlu,  hither ;  yogo  gun,  come  here, 

vdvd,  there  ;  are  vdvd,  he  is  there. 

Anlaga  wi  janja  vdvd,  People  they  work  there. 

go,  or  gogo,  thither ;  e  hhida  gogo,  he  goes  there  ;  place 

or  direction. 
mevdnld,  in  that  direction,  so  ;  directions  or  orders  to  a 

helmsman. 
.    gwi,  where,  o  Jcmda  gwi  f  you  go  where  ? 
vingovlngo,  around,  from  pingwa,  to  deflect,  iraper, 

reduplicated  to  vingovingo,  round  about. 
haraba,  near,  igonho,  above. 
Tcili,  for  a  short  time,  mi  Tcenda  g^oi'Mtanga  MU,  Tee 

fwinlia,  I  go  to  the  ship  for  a  time  and  return. 

ADVERBS    OF   TIME. 

35.  Jdni,  day  hefore  yesterday  ;  jau,  yesterday. 
Nlerdd,  to-day  ;  menle,  to-morrow. 
Mhanli,  two  ;  day  after  to-morrow. 

Jajangwe,  presently  ;  e  Ha  jajangwe,  he  comes  pres- 
ently, soon. 
Jangojango  (of  motion),  softly,  slowly. 
Tete  venld,  ahia  tete  venld,  he  came  just  now. 
PeTcepeke,  pe  henda  pe  Mnda,  still  going,  still  going, 
continually,  forever. 
Many  adverbs  are  in  the  form  of  regular  verbs,  having 
different  modes  and  tenses  in  use,  as  follows  : 

E  he  donge  henda,  he  will  first  go. 
Whdongi  henda,  they  first  went,  or  firsted  to  go. 
-Vv^'  Longe  ja^a  hd  vange  syeva  : 

''  First      work  and    then        play. 


ORTIIOGKAPHT.  27 

Fa^  again  ;    efd  hia^  lie  again  conies. 
Yd  fwinliinli,  again  return. 
Wi  ga  vd  -naige,  they  must  again  learn. 
Sunga,  soon,  quickly  ;  zunge  henda^  quickly  go. 
zunge  fwinlianli,  return  ye  quickly. 
In  these  verbal  adverbs  the  principal  verb  takes  the  impera- 
tive jilural  ending,  when  the  nominative  is  plural. 

Some  adverbial  conjunctions  are  used  in  the  formation  of 
the  Subjunctive  Mode,  and  these  are  correlative. 
e/a,  or  jdgd,  if;  gamhhile,  then,  pres.  tense. 
Kdnle^  if,  gavdoild^  then,  historical  tense. 

ADVEEBS  OF  MANNEE,  CAUSE. 

36.  Nldnld,  yenld,  so,  that  is  true,  that  is  right. 
Piere^  near,  almost ;  posyo,  more  ;  polo,  much.    • 
Ga,  ga  nte,  as,  so  a:-. 

G'dbwi,  openly,  boldly. 
Vende,  perchance,  e  vende  Ma,  lest  he  come. 
0  vende  jposwa,  perchance  you  fall. 
Yendetua,  perhaps  ;  if  it  turn  out. 
Yencletua  e  halua,  perhaps  he  change. 
Yanganle,  even  ;  vanganle  gojua,  even  to  die. 
Yange  nldnld,  suppose  it  be  so. 
Toazange,  it  may  be. 

ADVEEBS    OF   NEGATION. 

Wyawe,  no,  in  answer  to  a  question. 
Byawege,  no,  emphatic  ;  rather  slangy. 
Pa,  not ;  e pa  Jce7ida,.he  has  not  gone. 
Mi  a  mie,  I  do  not  know  ;  negative  accent. 

PEEP0SITI0N8. 

37.  These  are  few,  but  taking  their  special  significations 
from  the  verbs  with  which  they  are  used,  one  preposition 
answers  many  purposes. 

Go,  to,  on,  at,  with,  etc. ;  akendi  go  nJcala,  he  has  gone  to 
town.     E  pila  go  nJcala,  he  is  from  town. 


28  MPONGWE   GRAMMAE. 

Are  go  rtago,  he  is  in  the  house. 

Are  gw'igala,  he  is  in  the  street,  or  out  of  doors.  Here 
the  0  is  elided  because  coming  before  i^  and  w  is  inserted  as 
a  vinculum  for  the  sake  of  euphony.  Go^  when  used  with 
reference  to  persons,  is  changed  to  gore  y  vtii  ahia  gore  we, 
I  have  come  to  you. 

Hi  a^ila  gore  ye,  I  am  from  him. 

Mia,  with  ;  e  henda  nla  m.ie,  he  goes  with  me. 

E  janja  nla  wao,  he  works  with  them. 

Nli,  with  ;  the  instrument :  nil  ntyambi,  with  a  harp. 

nVeremi,  with  an  ax  ;  nli  njali,  with  a  gun. 

nUinkavi  s'ayogo,  with  paddles. 

WcV,  as  the  agent ;  and  is  seldom,  or  never,  used  except  in 
composition  with  the  objective  case  of  the  second  or  third 
persons  singular  of  the  personal  pronoun,  making  ndd  and 
nde,  ijanja  sijanjo  ndd,  the  work  which  is  worked  by  you. 

Ntyonli  y''avangio  ndd,  the  wagon  made  by  you. 

Elende  zavanlio  nde,  the  boat  hewed  out  by  him ;  used 
with  the  passive  voice. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

Copulative  Conjunctions. 

38.  Wli,  and  ;  iddnibe  nli  rnbonli,  a  sheep  and  goat. 
Anlome  nVanto,  men  and  women. 
NVaghidi  wao,  and  they  went. 

Ke,  also  ;  awe  he,  o  he  Mnda, 

you  also,    you  will  go. 

Kd  ;  wonganli  ye,  hd  jekelianli  ye,  take  ye  him,  and 

judge  him. 
Mte,  as  ;  gamha  nte  pihilid,  speak  as  you  think. 
Kdnde,  because  :  akenda  Icdnde  afwelio, 

he  went  because  he  was  called. 

Saml)o,  therefore,  consequently.     E  jdgd,  samho  azye 
ngulu  yi  hia.     Pie  is  sick,  therefore  he  cannot  come. 

DISJUNCTIVE    CONJUNCTIONS. 

39.  Vanganle,   although,   even   if.     Mi    Mnda  vanganle 

wodu  w^afwinlia,  I  go  even  if  they  all  return. 


OETHOGKAPHT.  29 

Ndo,  but ;  mi  ajasi,  ndo  mi  henda,  I  am  tired,  but  I  go. 
Kao,  exeept.      Waodu  w'dbienli,  hao  Hemamo, 

All  have  come,  except  Eemamo. 

Kdnde  vonde^  for  if. 

Ka  jporo^  much  more. 

Kclnde  vonde  ijiia  s'avanginli  nVipava  soma  mdri  j 

Ted  poro  *  *  *  *  loi  he  panginla  gw'einenld  nVomd 

mdri,  Jisu  Krais.     Rom.  v.  lY. 

Note. — In  Mpongwe,  as  in  other  languages,  the  different  classes 
of  particles  blend  with  each  other  in  their  uses,  especially  con- 
junctions and  adverbs.  The  above  classification  must,  therefore, 
of  necessity  be  imperfect. 

INTEEJECTIONS. 

40.  Interjeetions  abound  in  frequency,  but  not  in  number. 
The  more  common  are  the  following  : 

Em,e  !  wonderful  !  did  you  ever  ! 

Mongisweni!     About    the   same   as  the  first,   but   much 

coarser. 
I^gd  !  indeed  1  is  it  true !  implying  doubt,  or  unconcern. 

Well,  what  if  it  be  so  ? 
Giligili,  reti,  true,  affirmation. 
Ei,  ngwe  !  O  mother  !  ngwe  yam  !  my  mother ! 
Yo  !  that  is  right ;  yo^  yenld,  liria,  so,  thus,  make  fast. 
Ydgdrenli  !  hear,  give  attention. 

Note. — These  interjections  and  exclamations  ai-e  usually  ac- 
companied by  very  significant  gesticulations,  often  more  express- 
ive than  elegant. 

YERBS. 

41.  The  Mpongwe  verb  is  almost  unrivaled  in  the  variety 
extent  and  regularity  of  its  inflections, 

EEGULAE   VERBS. 

42.  With  the  exception  of  less  than  a  dozen,  all  tlie  verbs 
in  the  language  are  regular ;  and  they  are  inflected  to  mark 


30 


MPONGWE    GRAMMAR. 


Conjugation,  Yoice,  Mode  and  Tense.  The  characteristics  of 
a  regular  verb  are :  1st.  That  its  incipient  letter  in  the  root 
(Pres.  Indie.)  must  be  a  consonant.  2d.  That  it  must  be  of 
two  or  more  syllables.     3d.  That  it  must  terminate  with  a. 

The  consonants  with  which  a  regular  verb  can  commence 
are,  b,  d,  f,  j,  k,  m,  n,  p,  s,  t,  and  sy  ;  each  one  of  which  has 
its  reciprocal  consonant,  into  which  it  is  invariably  changed 
•to  form  the  imperative  and  potential  modes,  and  certain  of 
its  past  tenses.  If  the  vei'b  commence  with  5  in  the  present  • 
indicative,  the  h  is  changed  to  w^  or  the  intermediate  -y,  to 
form  the  imperative  mode  ;  thus  :  mi  honga,  I  take  ;  wonga, 
take  thoii ;  7)ii  haga,  I  bring ;  vaga,  bring  thou.  If  the  verb 
begin  with  cZ,  the  d  is  changed  to  I,  thus  :  ini  dcncia,  I  do ; 
lenda,  do  thou.  So  f  is  changed  to  w^  or  its  intermediate  v, 
thus  :  oni  fala,  I  throw  ;  wala,  throw  thou  ;  mi  fela,  I  put ; 
vela,  put  thou.  In  like  manner  j  is  changed  to  y,  h  to  g,  m 
has  no  reciprocal,  n  to  nl,  I  very  slight,  ^  to  -y,  5  to  s,  t  to  r. 

43.  The  following   table  will  more  fully  illustrate   these 
changes,  thus : 


iNDICAXrVE. 

E  honga,  he  takes  ; 
E  haga,  he  brings  ; 
E  denda,  he  does  ; 
E  fala^  he  throws  ; 
E  fela,  he  puts  ; 
E  janja^  he  works  ; 
E  henda,  he  goes  ; 
E meniza,  he  iinishes  ; 
E  noga,  he  builds  ; 
E jpanga,  he  makes  ; 
E  songa,  he  follows  ; 
Etmda,  he  writes ; 


Imperative. 

Wonga,  take  thon ; 
vaga,  bring  thou ; 
lenda,  do  thou ; 
wala,  cast  thou ; 
vela,  put  thou ; 
yanja,  work  thou ; 
genda,  go  thou  ; 
7)ienliza,  finish  thou ; 
nloga,  build  thou  ; 
van.ga,  make  thou ; 
song  a,  follow  thou  ; 
renda,  write  thou  ; 


Note  ], — The  imperative  singular  takes  the  accent  on  the  ulti- 
mate syllable,  the  plural  on  the  penult.  Accents  of  negation  in 
the  imperalivo  are  usually  on  the  lirst  vowel  or  initial  syllable  of 
the  word. 


r 


OETIIOGEAPnY.        '  31 

CONJUGATION    OF   THE    VERB. 

4:4:.  Every  regular  verb  Las  a  variety  of  derived  forms, 
made  either  by  prefixes  or  suffixes,  adding  by  these  aug- 
ments to  the  signification  of  the  radical.  And  those  modifi- 
cations or  species  of  the  verb,  for  the  sake  of  convenience, 
we  call  Conjugations,  very  much  after  the  manner  of  the 
Hebrew  Grammars.  The  Mpongwe  verb  has  an  unvarying 
form  of  the  passive  voice,  changing  a  final  of  the  active  into  o. 

Tliese  Conjugations  are  simple,  that  is,  taking  a  single 
augment ;  and  compound,  that  is,  taking  two  or  more  aug- 
ments. 

All  the  Conjugations  except  one,  the  reflexive,  suffix  the 
augments. 

I.    EADICAL   CONJUGATION. 

45.  This  expresses  the  simple  idea  expressed  by  the  verb, 
without  any  modification  whatever,  unless  it  be  by  intonation 
or  accent. 

Nmnber  and  person  do  not  belong  to  the  verb. 

3Ii  fonda,  I  love  ;  'wi  tondcf,  they  love  ; 

md  khida,  I  go  ;  amcd  Icenda,  ye  go. 

II.  CAUSATIVE    CONJUGATION. 

46.  This  is  derived  from  the  radical  by  changing  final  a 
into  i,  and  suffixing  sa,  or,  simpler,  by  changing  final  a  into 
iza  ;  thus,  janja,  work  ;  janjiza,  cause  to  work.  This  gives 
neuter  verbs  a  causative  or  active  sense  ;  -nanla,  sleep  ;  nan- 
lisa,  cause  to  sleep.  And  very  nearly  allied  to  this,  in  form 
and  signification,  is  this  : 

hamha,  speak  ;  Tcajnhia,  intei'pret. 
Mnda,  go  ;  Mndia,  guide. 

III.  RELATIVE   CONJUGATION. 

47.  This  is  formed  from  the  radical  by  changing  final  a 
into  i,  and  sufiixing  the  preposition  nla,  thus  :  Jcwnha,  speak  ; 
kambinla^  speak  for,  or  to  one  ;  janja,  work  ;  janjinla,  work 
for  one.     The  forms,  hamla.,  speak  ;  Icainltia,  interpret ;  ken- 


32  MPONGWE    GKAMMAE. 

fi«,  go  ;  Jcendia^  guide  ;  seem  to  be  a  compromise  between 
the  Relative  and  Causative  conjugations. 

lY.    FREQUENTATIVE    CONJUGATIOaST. 

48.  This  is  used  to  express  repeated  or  continuous  action  ; 
and  is  formed  by  suffixing  ga  to  the  radical,  thus :  janja, 
work  ;  janjaga,  work  continually  ;  jenla,  look  ;  jenlaga,  look 
continuously, 

Y.    EEFLEXIVE    CONJUGATION. 

49.  Yerbs  in  this  Conjugation  have  their  subject  and  object 
identical  ;  corresponding  to  the  Middle  Yoice  in  Greek,  and 
the  Hitbpacl  Conjugation  in  Hebrew.  It  is  formed  by  chang- 
ing the  initial  consonant  of  the  radical  into  its  reciprocal,  and 
prefixing  sya,  thus  :  ajoiila,  he  killed  ;  asyayonla^  he  killed 
himself ;  amrjpi,  he  has  improved ;  asyame^i,  he  rectified 
himself ;  aholi,  he  struck ;  asyawoli,  he  struck  himself ; 
e  jovunlli,  she  is  washing ;  e  syayovunla,  contracted  into 
e  sydvunla,  she  bathes. 

YI.    RECIPROCAL    CONJUGATION. 

50.  This  is  formed  by  suffixing  nla  to  the  radical ;  as,  wi 
hainha,  they  talk,  or  speak  ;  wi  Tcambanla,  they  converse, 
talk  together  ;  wi  tonda,  they  lore  ;  wi  tondanla,  they  love 
each  other  ;    wi  joinanla,  they  dispute. 

YII.    INDEFriSriTE   CONJUGATION. 

51.  This  is  formed  by  reduplicating  the  radical,  and  chang- 
ing the  initial  consonant  of  the  reduplication  into  its  recipro- 
cal, thus :  e  kamha,  he  speaks ;  e  kamhagaiiiba,  he  babbles,      « 
talks  at  random  ;  e  henda,  he  goes,  walks  ;  e  hendagenda^  he 
walks  to  and  fro  with  no  object. 

These  Conjugations  are  exhibited  at  one  view  in  the  follow- 
ing table : 

1.  liadical  Conjugation. — Tcamha,  speak. 

2.  Caus.  "  kanibiza^  cause  to  speak. 

3.  Relative  "  hamhinla,  speak  for^another.         ^rt- 

4.  Frequent've    "  kamhaga^  speak  continuously. 


•   OETHOGEAPHY.  33 

5.  Heflexive  Conjugation. — syaganiba,  speak  to  oneself. 

6.  Reciprocal  ''  hambanla^  converse. 

7.  Indefiinte  "  kambagamha,  babble. 

The  5tli,  reflexive  form,  is  seldom,  if  ever,  nsed  witli  Tcamba, 
but  is  insei'ted  for  uniformity. 

There  is  a  variety  of  other  forms  of  modifying  the  signifi 
cation  of  words,  but  they  are  irregular  verbs,  thus :  mi  nya^ 
I  eat ;  ml  nyczs,  I  feed  him  ;  mi  jonga,  I  drink  ;  mi  jooije, 
I  cause  him  to  drink,  or  give  him  drink.     And  there  is  an- 
other meaning  to  the  word  nyeza,  feed  ;  nyeza  mie  ibe  sam,   /u.ivoc  ^  :'r-fL-f* 
cause  me  to  eat  my  sin,  or,  annihilate  me  my  sin.     'No  one.  '^      ' 

word  is  properly  used  in  all  these  Conjugations. 

COMPOUND   CONJUGATIONS. 

52.  By  combining  two  or  more  of  the  simple  conjugations, 
we  may  form  as  many  more.  Thus  the  causative  and  fre- 
quentative combined,  form  Jca7nhisaga,  cause  to  speak  con- 
tinually. The  causative,  relative,  and  frequentative  form 
kamhinlasaga,  to  cause  to  speak  to,  or  for,  another  continu- 
ously. But  the  following  table  will  exhibit  this  to  the  eye 
better  than  words  can  describe  it : 

TABLE    OF   COMPOUND    CONJUGATIONS. 

1.  ^amhizaga,  causative  and  frequentative. 

2.  Jcamhinlaga,  relative  and  frequentative. 

8.  hamhinlaza,  relative  and  causative.    "  v' 

4.  hciTribinlazaga,  relative,  causative,  and  frequentative. 

5.  hambaganibaga,  indefinite  and  frequentative. 

6.  hambagamblza,  indefinite  and  causative. 

7.  hamhagamhizaga,  indefinite,  causative  and  frequentative. 

8.  TcainbagamMnla^  indefinite  and  relative. 

9.  kambagambinlaga,  indefinite,  relative,  and  frequentative. 

This  table  might  be  extended,  but  this  is  deemed  sufficient, 
and  not  many  single  words  can  be  used  with  all  these  conju- 
gations; and  not  many  of  them  are  in  common  use  with  any 


34r  MPONGWE    GRAMMAR. 

words.  But  any  adult  native  will  underotand  and  use  all 
these,  and  more,  if  need  be.  Each  has  a  well-defined  mean- 
ing ;  and  each  can  be  inflected  through  all  the  voices,  modes, 
and  tenses,  by  the  same  rules  and  principles  as  in  the  radical 
conjugation.  The  Yoices,  Modes,  and  Tenses  are  all  formed 
on  the  initial  and  final  syllables  of  the  compound  conjuga- 
tions, indicating  that  the  augments  are  considered  as  parts  of 
the  woixls  themselves. 

Many  verbs  whose  radicals  are  neuter  or  intransitive,  are. 
made  transitive  hy  some  of  the  conjugations. 

Most  of  the  verbs  have  not  only  an  active  and  passive 
form,  but  a  negative,  active,  and  passive  form  ;  and  verbs  in 
the  middle  voice  take  the  negative  form. 

53.  Negation  is  expressed  :  1st.  By  the  particle  pa^  coming 
immediately  before  the  verb  ;  thus,  o  pa  hela,  you  do  not 
want ;  e  pa  T)ia,  he  has  not  come  ;  wi  pa  henda,  they  have 
not  gone.  This  pai'ticle  is  used  principally,  if  not  wholly, 
with  the  indicative  mode,  present  tense.  2d.  By  an  accent, 
usually  on  the  first  syllable  of  the  verb,  but  sometimes  on  the 
auxiliary  to  the  verb  ;  and  this  accent  often  changes  the  tense, 
without  changing  the  form  of  the  verb.  Thus :  Mi  henda^ 
I  go  ;  mi  lienda,  I  did  not  go  ;  emphatic,  rai  JcQnda  du^  I  did 
not  go  at  all,  du  being  the  radical  syllable  of  the  word  all ; 
mi  agQnde,  I  will  not  go — positive  refusal.  This  negative 
accent  troubles  not  only  foreigners,  but  even  natives,  intelli- 
gent and  educated  in  their  way,  and  sometimes  they  change 
the  structure  of  a  sentence,  that  they  may  be  sure  not  to  be 
misunderstood  as  expressing  an  afiirmative  when  they  mean 
a  negative,  or  a  negative  when  they  mean  an  afiirmative.  In 
the  future  it  changes  neither  form  or  tense  ;  thus,  e  he  henda, 
he  will  go  ;  e  he  IcBida,  he  will  not  go ;  mi  nk^^niba^  I  did 
not  speak.  Here  a  nasal  sound,  expressed  by  n  prefixed  to 
the  verb,  makes  an  element  in  the  negation.  There  are  also 
words  which  seem  to  be  of  themselves  negatives,  and  contain 
in  themselves  the  substantive  verb  re :  azyele,  he  is  not ; 
azya,  contraction  of  the  former,  and  used  as  a  substantive. 
Ga  mie,  not  me,  or  not  I ;   used  in  prompt  denial.     These 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  35 

last  three  ^^ords,  each  may  take  all  the  personal  pronouns  im-. 
mediately  following.  Araiiga  mie,  not  me.  When  a  pro- 
noun, subject  of  a  verb,  follows  the  verb,  it  always  takes  the 
objective  foi-m. 

MODES. 

54.  The  Mpongwe  verb  has  five  modes ;  the  Indicative, 
Imperative,  Subjunctive,  Potential,  and  Infinitive.  These 
are  identical  with  the  modes  as  defined  in  Eng-lish  g-rammars. 
The  Indicative  is  here  treated  as  the  radical  form  of  the  verb. 
All  the  tenses  are  used  in  this  mode. 

55.  The  Imperative  is  formed  from  the  Indicative  by  chang- 
ing its  initial  into  its  reciprocal  consonant ;  thus,  mi  Jcenda, 
I  go ;  genda,  go  thou  ;  e  panga,  he  makes  ;  vangajiU,  make 
ye ;  asue  tenda,  we  write ;  rendanli,  write  ye.  There  are 
contracted  forms  of  certain  verbs,  used  only  in  the  impera- 
tive ;  thus,  oka,  go  ahead  ;  oJcanli,  go  ahead  ye,  from  kenda, 
go ;  oviro,  come  on  ;  oviroanli,  come  on,  from  hia,  come ; 
yogo,  come ;  yogonli  gunu,  come  ye  here,  seems  to  be  a  verb 
used,  only  in  the  imperative. 

STJBJTIlSrCTIVE   MODE. 

56.  The  characteristic  of  this  mode  is  a  prefixed  to  the 
radical  form  of  the  verb,  both  in  the  conditional  and  conclu- 
sive members  of  a  sentence.  The  conditional  particle,  in  the 
present  tense,  is  ja ;  and  the  conclusive,  gambenle ;  ja  mi 
ahenda  go  nkcda,  gambenle  mi  ajenle,  if  1  go  to  town,  then  I 
see  (or  shall  see)  him.  This  is  the  common  simple  form. 
But  a  clause  coming  between  the  conditional  and.  conclusive 
members  of  the  sentence,  often  causes  gamhenle  to  be  dropped. 
But  the  tenses  vary  these  particle  signs  of  the  subjunctive 
mode,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following  example :  J^do  aroe 
'nle,  Krais  e  tongwa,  gavdnld  ikamhinli  sazyo  nVosaon  wan- 
yawe,  But  if  Christ  be  not  risen,  or  have  not  risen  (Greek, 
Perf.  Passive),  then  is  our  faith  vain. 

In  the  perfect  tense,  Mnle  is  the  sign  of  the  subjunctive  in 
the  conditional  sentence,  and  gavdnld  in  the  conclusive  ;  and 


36  MPONGVv'E  GEAMMAE. 

in  simple  cotiset-utive  sentences  a  is  prefixed  to  the  verbs  in 
both. 

POTENTIAL    MODE. 

57.  The  characteristics  of  this  mode  are,  changing  the  in- 
itial consonant  of  the  radical  into  its  reciprocal,  and  the  final 
a  into  ^,  and  placing  th^  particle  ga  before  the  verb,  thus  :. 

7ni  ga  gende  go  inTcala^ 

I  must     go      to      town. 

azue  ga  gambe  nla  'Wao, 

we  must  speak   with  them. 

oywanla  e    ga  ronde    ngi    ye, 

child       he  must      love     mother  hia. 

anlaga  wi  ga  venginle  gw'elende, 

people  they  must         wait  in  boat. 

For  urgency  the  plural  takes  the  ending  of  the  imperative 

plural : 

azue  ga  ghidenli^ 

we     must  surely  go. 

Another  form  of  the  Potential  Mode  retains  the  form  of 
the  radical,  and  takes  the  auxiliary  I'd  instead  of  ga,  and  the 
subjective  of  the  verb  is  usually  in  the  objective  case  ; 

Awe  hd  janja  ?     You  can  work  ? 
Ih,  m.ie  lid  janja.     Yes,  I  can  work. 
"With  the  auxiliary  td  the  same  forms  hold. 

INFINITrVE   MODE. 

58.  The  sign  of  the  infinitive  is  go,  before  the  radical  form 
of  the  verb,  thus  :  Mi  kenda  g'^oloiiiba  go  Tcola,  I  go  up  the 
river  to  trade.  But  when  the  infinitive  follows  immediately 
the  preceding  verb,  the  particle  go  is  dropped  : 

e  hele  fwinlia,  he  wants  to  return. 
Tni  he  hove  nha/vi,  I  go  bring  the  oar. 

Here  he  is  a  contraction  from  henda,  go.  Ifi  tbiule  nenga, 
I  love  to  learn.  The  verb  tonda  is  also  used  with  another 
meaning,  aronde  henda,  love  not  to  go  ;  or,  never  mind  going. 


OKTIIOGBAPHT.  37 

This  mode  is  also  nsed  thus :  are  go  henda,  he  is  to  go. 

■  Another   structure   makes   a   greater   change :    w'akendi  go 

janja  aUng'  ipa,  they  went  to  work  and  get  pay.     Aleng'  is 

here  in  the  conjunctive  form,  and  retains  the  same  mode  and 

tense  as  the  preceding  verb. 

TENSE,    NUMBER,    AND    PERSON    OF    VERBS. 

59.  Except  in  the  imperative  plural,  verbs  have  no  change 
or  form  for  number  or  person. 

Four  consecutive  tenses  are  formed  by  changes  on  the  verb, 
without  the  aid  of  auxiliary  particles. 

60.  The  Present  tense  is  identical  with  the  English.  E  Mn- 
da,  he  goes. 

The  immediate  Past  tense  is  formed  from  the  present  b}' 
dropping  e  and  prefixing  «,  thus  :  akenda^  he  has  gone  ;  but 
is  within  sight,  or  call.  Whether  the  personal  pronoun  e,  of 
the  present,  is  changed  to  a^  and  is  still  a  pronoun,  or  whether 
the  a  is  to  be  construed  in  some  other  way,  is  not  yet  settled. 

61.  For  want  of  a  better  term  we  designate  another  the 
Paulo  Past  tense.  It  indicates  time  farther  advanced  than 
the  immediate  past,  but  not  extending  beyond  to-day.  It  is 
formed  from  the  immediate  past  by  changing  final  a  into  *', 
thus :  akendi,  he  has  gone. 

62.  The  historical  tenge  indicates  indefinite  past  time,  not 
including  the  present  day  ;  and  is  formed  from  the  paulo  past 
tense  by  changing  the  initial  consonant  into  its  reciprocal, 
thus  :  agendi,  he  went. 

63.  The  perfect  tense  is  formed  by  placing  the  substantive 
verb  are  as  an  auxiliary  before  the  radical,  and  the  particle 
^a  after  it,  thus  :  are  Jcendaga  pa,  he  has  gone. 

Another  construction  puts  the  subject  of  the  verb  between 
the  auxiliary  and  the  verb,  thus  : 

yi  re  mie  fela  pa  g'oga  wd, 

which  I  have     put      in    hand  thine.  ' 

But  here  Tnil?,  nominative  to  fela,  is  in  the  objective  form. 

64.  The  pluperfect  tense  is  formed   by  placing   the  past 


38  MPONGWE    G'EAMMAE. 

tense  of  the  substantive  verb  duo  before  the  paulo  past 
tense  of  the  verb,  thus :  aduo  akendagi,  he  was,  he  Avent ;  or 
he  had  gone ;  or,  mi  aluo  7)ii  akendagi,  I  was,  I  went,  or  I 
had  gone. 

65.  The  first  future  tense  is  formed  by  placing  before  the 
radical  the  auxiliary  particle  he,  thus  :  e  he  Tcenda^  he  will  go  ; 
wi  he  hmda,  they  will  go. 

QQ.  The  second  future  is  formed  from  the  first  future  by 
placing  before  it  the  substantive  verb  duo  in  the  immediate  • 
past  tense,  thus  :  aduo  e  he  henda,  he  will  have  gone  ;  or,  lit- 
erally, he  was,  he  will  go. 

67.  There  is  also  another  form  of  a  past  tense  used  in  nar- 
ration, but  becoming  obsolete.  This  form  also  takes  the  nom- 
inative after  the  verb,  and  then  repeats  the  verb  in  a  different 
form,  thus : 

Nle  he  hidia  Anyamhie  awuUnie  Noah,  inle, 

And       spake  God  He  spake  to  Noah  thus. 

The  initial  particle  nle  is  frequently  omitted.  There  are 
other  tenses  formed  by  accents,  which  will  be  better  illus- 
trated in  the  paradigm  of  the  verb. 

IRREGTJLAE   VERBS. 

68.  These  are  not  numerous,  neither  is  it  necessary  to  give 
a  full  list,  or  an  extended  analysis  of  them.  Avoro,  know ; 
used  only  in  the  present  indicative,  and  used  regularly  with 
all  the  numbers  and  persons  of  the  personal  pronouns  : 

Agami,  dislike  ;  same  rule  as  above. 
Oha,  sin.     OTcanli,  pi.,  go  ahead. 
OvirOy  sin.     Oviroaidi,  pi.,  come  on. 

The  last  two  used  only  in  the  imperative. 

Gka  is  doubtless  contracted  from  Mnda,  go.  Oviro  is  also 
contracted  from  hia,  come.  Bia,  come ;  rnia,  know  ;  and 
others  containing  only  a  diphthong,  are  treated  as  monosyl- 
lables, and  are  formed  like  pa  and  nya,  to  give,  eat ;  thus : 
'mi  pa,l  give  ;  mi  ajoenli  I  have  given ;  Tni  a/venli,  I  gave. 


ORTHOGKAPHY.  39 

Ge  nya,  go,  eat ;  and  some  others  are  contractions,  and 
used  only  in  the  indicative  and  impei-ative.  Toa  is  used  as 
an  auxiliary,  sometimes  as  a  principal  verb,  but  usually  with 
a  conditional  sentence.  Some  of  the  substantive  verbs  are  also 
irregular. 

SUBSTANTIVE   VERBS, 

69.  There  is  a  number  of  verbs  used  with  this  signiiication, 
but  most  of  them  with  other  meanings.  lie  is  used  exclu- 
sively to  express  existence,  as,  are,  he  is ;  yi  re,  it  is  ;  and  is 
used  only  in  the  present  tense.  Pegaga  is  a  regular  verb, 
used  principally  to  express  existence  in  the  past  tenses. 

JDoanla  is  also  a  regular  verb,  used  to  express  existence, 
but  more  commonly  has  the  meaning  of  dwelling.  Duo  is  a 
contraction  from  doanla,  sometimes  used  to  express  being, 
but  more  commonly  is  an  auxiliary  to  form  tenses,  thus  :  adiio 
akendagi,  he  had  gone,  or  he  was,  he  went. 

Wle  answers  often  the  purpose  of  a  verb  of  existence,  but 
its  nominative  is  always  in  the  objective  form,  and  usually 
comes  after  the  verb,  as,  nle  mie,  it  is  me.  Toa  is  also  used 
in  the  sense  of  to  be,  and  to  become,  thus  :  "  Sa^nho  atoe  mie 
mhia,  atoe  wao  nibia,  "yenld  agamhinli  sue,  yenld  he  ayiviri 
nlue  ":  "  Therefore,  whether  it  be  I,  whether  it  be  they,  so 
we  preached,  and  so  ye  believed."  1  Cor.  xv.  11. 
^^Are  he  toa  jpa  Hdlond''  alonga^' 

He  has  also  become  tlie  fruit       first. 

Toa  is  a  regular  verb,  used  in  most  of  "the  modes  and  tenses. 

SUBSTANTIVE   VERBS   NEGATIVE. 

70.  There  are  a  number  of  words  that  express  negation  of 
existence  or  denial  of  fact,  and  are  used  principally  in  the 
present  tense. 

Aranga  ye,  not  him  ;  aranga  nlue,  not  you.  Ga,  contrac- 
tion of  aranga,  and  used  in  strong  positive  denial ;  ^a  rnie, 
not  me.  Zyele  y  azyele,  he  is  not ;  wi  zyeli,  they  are  not ; 
yi  zyele,  it  is  not.  Conti-acted,  azye  vcivd,  he  is  not  there. 
Zya,  contracted  from  same,  and  with  a  prefixed,  makes  sub- 


4:0  MPONGWE    GKAMMAK. 

junctive  mode ;  azya  mie,  gamhcnle  apera,  if  not  for  me 
then  he  had  perished  ;  azya  we,  gwmhenle  mi  ajita,  if  not  for 
yon  then  I  had  died. 

Most  of  these  words,  followed  by  the  preposition  nU,  ex- 
press possession  or  ownersliip,  thus :  are  nli  njali,  he  has  a 
gun  ;  wi  re  nVadd-mbe,  they  are  with  (or  possess)  sheep.  So 
also  the  negative  ;  asyele  nil  nyare,  he  is  not  with  (does  not 
possess)  a  cow  ;  azye  nVezdma,  he  has  not  a  tiling. 

The  regular  substantive  verbs  express  the  same  in  the  past 
tenses.  All  might  be  arranged  in  modes  and  tenses,  but  with 
the  irregular  it  would  be  only  a  repetition  of  the  numbers 
and  persons  of  the  pronouns. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Tl.  Not  every  word  that  we  translate  from  the  Mpongwe 
by  a  participle,  or  that  we  are  compelled  so  to  translate,  can 
properly  be  called  a  participle.  It  is  doubtless  difficult  to  dis- 
tinguish all  the  forms  that  might  be  placed  under  this  part  of 
speech,  but  a  few  will  be  noticed. 

Y2.  The  most  numerous  class  of  participles  is  that  formed 
by  prefixing  n  to  the  frequentative  conjugation,  thus  :  denda, 
do  ;  ndendaga,  doing  ;  Tcenda,  go  ;  nkendaga,  goiil^>  This 
is  frequently  used  with  an  emphatic  repetition  after  the  same 
verb,  thus  :  e  janja  njanjaga,  he  works  working,  or  he  works 
vigorously  and  continually  ;  e  jufa  njufaga,  he  steals  steal- 
ing, or  he  does  nothing  but  steal.  It  is  formed  also  with  the 
reciprocal  and  frequentative  conjugations,  thus  :  jcinja,  work  ; 
anloine  iiT arilome  njanjanlag''  agamla  mi  ntymdi,  men  with 
men  ^^•ol•king  that  which  is  unseemly  ;  working  mutually,  in- 
tensely and  incessantly. 

73.  Another  form  of  expression  we  are  compelled  to  trans- 
late with  a  participle,  but  the  analysis  of  the  Mpongwe  sen- 
tence is  somewhat  doubtful : 

Tombare  p'anto  nVawanla, 

Throwing;  out  women  and  children  ; 
or. 

Besides  women  and  children. 


OETHOaRA-PnY.  41 


Another  form  is  this 


Ngwe  avienli,  oijwanli  yejuwa  pa, 

The  motlier  came-,  her  child  having  died. 

Aioe  vie  nVincnga,  ha  Mnda  go  nhala, 

You  having  Gnished  learning,  can  go  to        town. 

Njdgu  jono  pa,  anlga  w-anyenli  ye^ 

Elephant  being  killed,         the  people    they  ate     him. 

There  is  also  another  form  of  the  passive  : 

JSfVavegagie  gogo  g''orove,    sydriago  nle  Setan.^ 
And  he  was     there  on  the  desert        tempted  by  Satan. 


PAE ADIGM 

OP  THE 

REGULAR  VERB  KA3fBA,  TO   SPEAK. 


Radical  CoNJUGATioisr. 
Active  and  Passive  Yoices. 

I*^EGATIVE   AND   AfEIKMATIVE. 

Indicative  Mode. 


Present  Tense. 
74.  ^  \   Act.     e  Tcamba^  lie  speaks. 


Pass,  e  kam^o,  he  is  spoken. 

Act.  e  h^niba,  he  does  not  speak. 

Pass,  e  h^iinbo,  he  is  not  spoken, 

ti)  j  Act.  a  gMYibe^  he  does  not  speak  (intensive). 

!^  ( Pass,  a  gsiijibo,  he  is  not  spoken"  to  (intensive). 


Immediate  Past  Tense. 
75.  ^"  j  Act.     a  Icainba^  he  spoke  (within  an  hour,  or  two). 
^  I  Pass,     a  hainbo,  he  was  spoken  "  "  " 

bb  j   Act.     e  pa  TcamTja^  he  spoke  not. 
^  I  Pass,     e  jpa  hamlo,  he  was  not  spoken. 

Paulo  Past  Tense. 
7C.  ^"  \    Act.     a  hainbi,  he  spoke  (to-day,  an  hour  past). 
<  i  Pass,     a  hambio,  he  was  spoken  (to-day,  an  hour  past). 
ti  \    Act.     e  pa  Tcarnba,  he  did  not  speak. 
!^  (  Pass,     e  pa  Jcarribo,  he  was  not  spoken. 
(42) 


PARADIGM.  43 


*  Historical  Tense. 

11.  ^  j  Act.  o,  gamhi,  he  spoke. 

<  I  Pass,  a  gamhio^  he  was  spoken. 

Act.  e  l&2i7nba,  he  did  not  speak. 

Pass,  e  himbo,  he  was  not  spoken. 


Perfect  Tense.* 
T8.  ^  j    Act.     are  hamha  ])a^  he  has  spoken. 

<  \  Pass,     are  hamho  pa,  he  was  spoken. 

bh  j   Act.     e  2)a  hamha,  he  has  not  spoken, 
'^  \  Pass,     e  pa  Jcanibo,  he  was  not  spoken. 

Pluperfect  Tense. 
T9.  ^'  j    Act.     a  luo  aJtamhi,  he  had  spoken. 

<  \  Pass,     a  luo  ahamhio,  he  had  been  spoken, 
bb  j    Act.     e  duo  akamhi,  he  had  not  spoken. 

^  (  Pass,     e  duo  ahanibio,  he  had  not  been  spoken. 

First  Future  Tense, 
e  he  hamha,  he  will  speak. 
e  he  hamho,  he  will  be  spoken. 
e  be  hamha,  he  will  not  speak. 
e  be  hamho,  he  will  not  be  spoken. 

Second  Future  Tense, 
e  he  duo  ahamhi,  he  will  have  spoken. 
e  he  duo  ahamhio,  he  will  have  been  spoken. 
e  d\xo  agamhi,  he  will  not  have  spoken. 
e  dxio  agamhi,  he  will  not  have  been  spoken. 

IMPERATIVE   MODE. 

Affirmative  Active. 
82.  ^3  ■?  I  Sing.     Gamha,  speak. 


80. 

1  \  ^«t- 
<  {  Pass. 

bD  i  Act. 
«  )  Pass. 

81. 

i  i  Act. 
<  (  Pass. 

bb  \   A.ct. 

^  '[  Pass. 

^'^  j    Plu.     Gamhanli,  speak  ye. 


a  O    ^ 


Sing.     Gamhare,  speak  (emphatic). 
Pin.     Gamharenli,  speak  je  (emphatic). 


M  MPONGWE    GEAMMAR. 


P  ^ 
^  o 


Sing      Gamhisa,  cause  to  speak. 
oo  I    piu.     Gambisanli,  cause  je  to  speak. 
g-g"  j  Sing.     Gamhizare,  cause  to  speak  (emphatic). 
<^^  I    Plu.     Gamhisarenli,  cause  ye  him  to  speak  (em- 
phatic). 

Remark. 
All  the  simple  and  compound  conjugations  foraa  their  im- 
peratives by  the  same  rules. 

Affirmative  Passive. 
83.  ;g-5'  j  Sing.     Ganibo,  be  spoken. 

(§5   (   Plu.     Gamlwnli,  be  ye  spoken. 

g-S"  j  Sing.     Gambiso,  cause  to  be  spoken. 

uo  I   PIq,     Gamhisonli^  cause  ye  to  be  spoken. 


Remark. 
In  the  passive  voice  the  imperative  mode  is  less  used  out 
of  the  radical  conjugation. 

Negative. 

84.  Sing,  ag^kinba,  speak  not. 

Plu.  agMYibanli,  speak  ye  not. 

Sing.  ar2^nde^  hamiba,  you  need  not  speak. 

Flu.  arSiude  Jca'iribenli,  ye  need  not  speak. 

Sing.  Rig''  Sigaiiriba^  leave  not  speak  (Donb.  l^eg.) 

Plu.  Rig^  a-gamhanli,  leave  not  speak  ye  (Doub.  Keg.) 

Rem,arJc. 
The  simple  verb  takes  the  negative  accent  on  the  second 
vowel,  and  the  prefixed  a  makes  a  part  of  the  negative  ele- 
ment. The  auxiliary  verb  tonda,  to  love,  takes  the  accent  in 
the  same  manner.  The  auxiliary  tiga,  to  leave,  contracted  to 
Rig^  in  imper.,  throws  the  negative  accent  on  to  the  initial 
vowel,  of  the  verb,  making  a  double  negative.  In  the  ex- 
pression (very  common)  rige  Jcamha,  the  form  and  force  of  the 
negative  is  in  the  auxiliary  rige,  leaving  the  verb  in  the  form 
of  the  indicative  present. 


PARADIGM.  45 

SUBJTJNCTIVE   MODE. 

Present  Tense. 

85.  ^  j    Act.     Ja  mi  ahamba,  if  I  speak. 

<  \  Pass.     Ja  mi  ahambo,  if  I  am  spoken, 
bi  j  Act.     Ja  mi  aga.ml)a,  if  I  speak  not. 

^   '  Pass.    Ja  mi  agixmbo,  if  I  am  not  spoken. 

Imperfect  Tense. 

86.  ^'  (   Act.     Kdnle  mi  ahambi,  if  I  spoke. 

<  \  Pass.     Kdnle  m,i  alcamblo,  if  I  was  spoken. 

Historical  Tense. 

87.  ^  \    Act.     Kdnle  mi  agamM.,  if  I  sj)oke. 

<  (  Pass.     Kdnle  mi  agambio,  if  I  was  spoken, 
tj)  j   Act.     Kdnle  mi  nh\mba,  if  I  did  not  speak. 
!^  I  Pass.     Kdnle  mi  nkdimbo^  if  I  was  not  spoken. 

Perfect  Tense. 

88.  ^  (  Act.     Jr(?5  inle  mi  akamhi.,  if  I  have  spoken. 

<  I  Pass.     -4rodmZ6  772^o^Zrw?5/o,  if  I  have  been  spoken, 
ix)  j   Act.     ^rO(3  ^7^Ze  mi  hiimba.,  if  I  have  not  spoken. 
"^  I  Pass.     Aroe  inle  m,i  kdLinbo,  if  I  have  not  been  spoken. 

Pluperfect  Tense. 

89.  ^  j   Act.     Kdnle  rni  aluo  mi  alcambi,  if  I  liad  spoken. 

<  I  Pass.     Kdnle  mi  aluo  me  ahambio,  if  liad  been    " 
bi)  (    Act.     Kdnle  mi  ndwo  mi  alcambi,  if  I  had  not  " 

'^  {  Pass.     Kdnle  mi  ndno  mi  aJcambio,  if  I  had  not 
been  spoken. 

CAUSATIVE    CONJUGATION. 

Present  Tense. 

» 

90.  £  j    Act.     Ja  mi  akambisa,  if  I  cause  to  speak. 

<  i  Pass.     Ja  mi  akambiso,  if  I  am  cansed  to  speak. 
Neg.  Same  as  the  radical  conjugation. 


46 


MPONGWE   GKAMIVIAE. 


91. 


92. 


11 


Imperfect  Tense.  * 

Act.     Kdnle  mi  akarnbizi,  if  I  caused  to  speak. 
Pass.     Kdnle  7ni  akaonbizio,  if  I  was  caused  to  speak. 

Historical  Tense. 
Act.     Kdnle  mi  agmnbizi,  if  I  caused  to  speak. 
Pass.     Kdnle  mi  agamMzio,  if  I  was  caused  to  speak. 
Act.     Aroenli  milc^imbiza,  caused  not  to  speak. 
Pass.     Aroenli  mi  h^nhizo,  if  was  not  caused  not 
to  speak. 

Perfect  Tense. 

93.  Act.     Kdnle  mi  are  hambiza  jya^  if  I  have  caused  to 

speak. 
Pass.     Kdnle  mi  are  Tcambizo  ;pa^  if  I  have  been  caused 

to  speak. 

Xst  Pluperfect  Tense. 

94.  r  Act.     Kdnle  mi  aduo  mi  akambizi^  if  I  had  caused 
to  speak. 

Kdnle  mi  aduo  mi  ahamhizio^  if  I  had  been 

caused  to  speak. 
Kdnle  mi  nduo  oni  aTcambizi,  if  I  had  not 

caused  to  speak. 
Kdnle  mi  aluo  mi  ahambizio.,  if  I  liad  not 

been  caused  to  speak. 

2(^  Pluperfect  Tense. 

95.  r  Act.     Kdnle  mi  aluo  mi  agarrMzi,  if  I  had  caused 
to  speak. 

Pass.     Kdnle  mi  aUio  mi  agambizio,  if  I  had  been 

caused  to  speak. 
Act.     Kdnle  mi  duo  mi  agambizi^  if  I  had  not 

caused  to  speak. 
Pass.     Kdnle  mi  duo  mi  agambizio,  if  I  had  not 

been  caused  to  speak. 

Note. — The  formation  of  tenses,  and  also  of  the  forms  of  the 
negatives,  are  the  same  in  the  remaining  Simple  and  in  all  the 
Compound  Conjugations. 


he  , 


Act. 
Pass. 

Act. 
Pass. 

Act. 


PARADIftM.  47 

The  correlative  of  Ja  or  Jdga,  is  Qambeiile.     The  correlative  of 
Tcanle  is  Qavanld.     Example : 

Ja  mi  akenda,  gambetile  awe  Ted  tiganla, 
If     I  go  then        you  can  remain. 

Kdnle    o  luo  venld,  gavdnld  .  .  .  .  e  tdjnwa  du. 
If      tliou  hadst  been  here,  then  ....  he  had  not  died. 

John  xi.  32. 

POTENTIAL    MODE. RADICAL    CONJUGATION. 

PTesent  Tense. 

96.  ^"  j   Act.     Mie  hd  hainha,  I  can  speak. 

<  [  Pass.  Mie  hd  hamlo,  I  can  be  spoken. 
^  j   Act.  2li  ga  gaonbe,  I  must  speak. 

<  \  Pass.  Mi  ga  gambo,  I  must  be  spoken. 
fcb  j   Act.  3£i  &.gaml)a,  I  must  not  speak. 

'^  \  Pass.     Mi  agambo,  I  must  not  be-spoken. 

Perfect  Tense. 

97.  ^  j  Act.     3fi  aid  'kaTnba,  I  might  speak. 

<  \  Pass.     Mi  aid  kambo,  I  might  be  spoken. 
gc  j  Act.     Mi  t'k  hamba^  I  could  not  speak. 

"^  \  Pass.     Mi  t-d  hambo,  I  could  not  be  spoken. 

Pluperfect  Tense. 

98.  Act.     Mi  ard  kambi,  I  might  have  spoken.  e 
Pass.     Mi  ard  kanibio,  I  might  have  been  spoken. 

Act.     Mi  nta,  kamha,  I  might  not  have  spoken. 

Mi  ntsi  kavibo,  I  might  not  have  been  spoken. 

INFINITIVE   MODE. 

99.  Akendi  go  kamha,  he  went  to  speak. 
Ake'  kamba,  he  went  to  speak. 
A7'e  go  janja,  he  is  to  work. 
Aleganli  go  kamha,  forbid  not  to  speak. 
E  toa  go  juwa.,  he  goes  to  die. 
JE  kenda  go  kola,  he  does  not  go  to  trade. 


48 


MPONGWE  GEAMMAK. 


Go  is  the  proper  sign  of  the  infinitive,  but  in  the  folloA\dng 
examples  go  ia  omitted  : 

Ehele  noge.  nago^  he  wants  to  build  a  house. 
Mi  tnnde  hole  mpunji,  I  love  to  buy  ivory. 
Zunge  hove  nhavi,  quick  bring  an  oar. 

In  these  examples  the  governing  verb  coming  directly  be- 
fore the  infinitive,  drops  go,  and  changes  final  a  into  e,  and 
the  verbs  oioge,  hole,  and  hove  coming  directly  before  nouns 
commencing  with  a  consonant,  change  the  normal  a  into  e. 


PAETICIPLE, 


100. 


Act. 
Pass. 

Act. 
Pass. 


Act. 

Pass. 


Present  Tense. 
JSfhamhaga,  speaking. 
Nhamhago,  spoken  to. 
Kamhinlaga,  speaking  with. 
Kaimhinlago,  spoken  with. 

Past  Tense: 
Kamhaga  pa,  having  spoken. 
Kamhago  pa,  having  been  spoken. 
Tomhare  pa,  having  thrown  out. 
vie  nli  janja,  ha  vange  sheva, 

having  finished  working,  then  plaj'. 


•  A   LIST   OF  SOME  ADVERBS. 

Baraba.     Near,  in  time  or  place,  or  number. 
Baraha  nli  mpcinld,  near  the  path. 
Baraha  nVomjnima  w'ard,  near  a  whole  year. 
Baraba  nli  ntausen,  near  a  thousand. 
Bo.     Far  oif.     Are  bo,  he  is  far  away. 
Bunya.     At  dawn.     Bunya,  gamhenle  azu'  ahendga. 
In  the  early  dawn,  then  we  go. 
Bwebwe.     Openly,  boldly. 
Go  bui.     Openly,    boldly.       E  henda    go    bni,    ndo 
mpanginli  ga  ntyd/ria,  he  walked   not 
openly,  but  as  it  were  in  secret. 


A   LIST   OF   SOME   ADVERBS. 


49 


•    JBuku.     Openly,  plainly,  from  v.  hukunla^  to  speak 
boldly  ;  intensive,  hukunla  huhu. 
NV  avukunlie  igamba  tnenydnla      T)uTcu^ 

and  he  opened  word  that  boldly,  plainly. 

Dadie.     Only.     2Iie  dadie  f     I  only  ? 
Dava.     Far  off.     Elende  zi  re  dava^  the  boat  is  far 
away. 
Davadava.     Intensive  of  last. 

Genld.     Neither.     2£i  Icimba  nla  toao,  genld  iy\kilia 
osaon  Tnewdnld,  I  did  not  speak  at  all 
with  them,  neither  think  of  that  aifair. 
Gohosyo.     Ahead.     Are  gobosyo,  he  is  ahead. 

Gogo.     There.      Wi  Jchida  gogo^  they  go  there. 
Gontye.     Below.     TF^re^c»^^2/<?,  they  are  on  the  ground. 
Wi  suminla  go  ntye^  they  descend  to  earth. 
GotHenld.     Just    now.       Wapegaga    gunlu    gotevenla, 
They  were  here  just  now. 
Gunlu.     Here,     Are  gunhi.,  he  is  here. 
Yogo  gun,  come  here. 
Gw'igonlo.     Above.     Inydnli    si   dogwa  gwHgolo, 

birds       they        fly  above. 

Yuginlia    yi    dandalanda  go  ntye, 

Insects       they  crawl  on  the  earth. 

Jajangwe.     Presently.     31i  hia  jajangwe,  I  come  pres- 
ently, by  and  by.  ♦ 
Jdnli.     Day  before  yesterday. 
Jan.     Yesterday. 
KendeTcende.     Softly,  softly.     Genda  nla  ye  Teende  hende 
hdnde  are  nla  sijdgd,  go  with  him  very 
softly,  because  he  is  very  sick. 
Kwekwe.     Sufficient. 

Kwe.     Very  little.     Genda  kwe,  go  a  little  way. 
Zyusya  hwe,  move  alon^  little. 
Kwevimo.     Little  shut  them,  a  wink,  an  instant. 
Mhiambie.     Well.     Ore  mhiamhie  f  are  you  well  ? 

Menle.     To-morrow.  Mi  hia  menle,  I  come  to-morrow. 
Ulenld.     To-day.    E  Icenda  nlenld,  he  goes  to-day. 
3 


50 


MPONGWE    GEAMMAK. 


Nleganlega.     Quickly.     Genda  nleganlega,  go  in  haste. 
Ngwa.     Sliut.     Nago  yi  re  ngioa,  the  house  is  shut. 
Wje.     Ajar.     Igugi  nyi  re  nje,  the  door  is  ajar. 
Nldnla.     Thus,  so.     Atoe  idanld^  it  happened  thus. 
Nlenld.     To-day. 

Nyawe.     ]^o.     0  Jcenda  .^  do  you  go  ?     Nyawe^  no. 
NyoAJoenyawe.    To  no  effect,  for  nothing.     Azw  akendi  vd 
nyawenyawe,  we  went  for  nothing. 
Nyawege.     No,  sir-ee,  by  no  means.     Genda   nla   mie. 
.    vdvd,  go  with  me  there.     JVya/wege,  by 
no  means. 
Pekepeke.     Contracted  from  pe  henda,  jpe  henda,  still  go- 
ing, still  going  ;  forever  and  ever. 
Pele.     Soon,  quickly.     Genda  pele,  go  soon,  imme- 
diately. 
Piere.     Near.     Atoeiili  piere  nVowatanga^   he   has 
come  near  the  ship. 
Polo.     Very.     JE  jdgd  polo.,  he  is  very  sick. 
Pegd.     Crookedly.     E  henda  rega,  he  walks  crook- 
edly.' 
Pelanganlo.     Crosswise.     Pere  yi  re  relanganlo,  the  sticks 
are  crosswise,  or  crossed. 
Tetevenld.     Just  now.     Abia  tetevenld,  he  came  just  now. 
Vanga.     So.      Vanga-nldnla,  mi  2igende,  even  if  so, 
I  will  not  go. 
Vdtevenld.     Just  now.     Ajanja  vdvd  vdtenenld  f  he  was 
working  there  just  now. 
Vdvd.     There.     E  doa/nla  vdvd.,\\&\\y&&  \hQ,x&. 
Yei.     Here.     A  re  vei,  he  is  here. 
Yendetua.     Perhaps.      Vendetua  wi  hia,  perhaps  they 
will  not  ccme. 
Yende.     Lest.     Genda  neganega,  e  vende  pera^ 

»|  Go  quickly  lest  he     escape. 

Yenld.     Here.      Wi  Ma  venld,  they  come  here. 
Yia.     Entirely.      Wanyenli  sodu  via,  they  have 
eaten  all  entirely. 
Yiaganlo.     Beyond.      Wdkendi  maganlo  nVowata/ngdy 


A   LIST   OF    SOME   ADVERBS.  51 

they  went  beyond  the  ship  ;  more  than. 
Winld  w'anlengi  viaganlo  nla  mewdnld, 
these  learned  more  than  those. 
Yenld.     So.     Yanja  yenld,  work  so. 

Donga.     First.     A  donge  Tchida^  he  first  went. 

Sunga.     Quickly.     Zunge  5*«,  quickly  come. 

Many  adverbs  are  used  as  adjectives,  and  in  the  same  form. 
The  last  two  adverbs  in  the  list  are  specimens  of  a  large  class 
in  the  form  of  regular  yerbs,  used  adverbially,  in  the  differ- 
ent modes  and  tenses,  and  uniformly  standing  next  before  the 
principal  verb. 

102.  For  an  imperfect  list  of  Prepositions,  Conjunctions, 
and  Interjections,  see  Paragraphs  37,  38,  39,  40. 


SYNTAX. 

103.  Every  proper  name,  or  name  of  person,  standing  be- 
fore the  verb,  takes  the  personal  pronoun  between  it  and  the 
verb,  thus  :  Njiwo  e  heiida  go  nhala,  Njiwo  she  goes  to  town. 
Angile  e  hole  m^pimji,  Angile  he  buys  ivory. 

Every  common  noun  also  takes  its  deiinite  pronoun  in  the 
same  manner,  thus : 

Mbonli  yi  Ha,  the  goat  it  comes. 
Izijage  nyi  dogwa,  the  duck  it  flies  ;  and 
Izydge  ny''adogwi,  the  duck  it  flew. 

In  the  last  sentence  i  coming  before  a  is  dropped. 

Otutu  wl panda,  the  smoke  it  rises. 
Enlingo  zi  powa,  the  tide  it  ebbs. 

NOimS    AJifD   NOUNS. 

104r.  The  possessive  case  is  f onned  by  the  use  of  the  defi- 
nite pronoun  standing  between  the  noun  limited  and  the  noun 
of  possession,  thus  :  Nago  y'^Onleme,  the  house  of  Onleme,  or 
Onleme's  house.  Nhavi  y^elende  si  Nttika,  oar  of  the  boat 
of  Ntaka,  or  oar  of  Ntaka's  boat.  Inyoi  ny^ordmbd,  the  voice 
of  the  trumpet. 

In  all  cases  the  definite  pronoun  must  agree  in  number  and 
class  with  the  preceding  noun,  thus :  Ahdnda  mi  ntyaga  yi 
Keiya,  the  plantains  of  Keiya's  garden.  In  this  sentence  mi 
agrees  in  number  and  class  with  aJcdndd,  and  yi  with  ntyaga. 
When  the  following  noun  commences  with  a  vowel,  the  i  of 
the  definite  pronoun  (or  articulation)  is  dropped,  and  the  frag- 
ment, a  consonant,  is  attached  to  the  noun  of  possession  with 
an  apostrophe. 
(52) 


•  SYNTAX.  53 

NOUN    AND   ADJECTIVE. 

105.  The  adjective  which  qualities  or  limits  the  noun  stands 
after  it,  and  must  be  of  the  same  number  and  class,  thus  : 

i 

JVago  mpolo,  house  large. 

Sinago  simjpolo  sirribia,  houses  large  good. 

Ezango  evolo,  book  large. 

Tango  volo,  books  large. 

Oldvi  ola,  river  long. 

Ilciv^  ila,  rivers  long. 

Sijavi  sida,  leaves  long. 

The  same  rule  of  arrangement  and  agreement  applies  to  all 
the  adjective  pronouns.  Instead  of  my  house,  it  is  house 
mine,  book  yours,  hat  his,  etc. 

106.  For  the  use  and  construction  of  personal,  definite,  ad- 
jective, and  interrogative  pronouns,  see  Paragraphs  20-23, 
and  29-32. 

VERBS. 

107.  Usually  in  a  direct  affirmation  or  narration,  the  sub- 
ject (or  nominative)  of  the  verb  stands  before  it.  But  in  a 
conjunctive  sentence  the  subject  of  the  verb  follows  it ;  and 
if  a  pronoun,  is  incorporated  with  it  after  the  manner  of  the 
Hebrew,  thus  :  NV awulinlie  ivao,  and  said  he  to  them. 

In  that  sentence  the  preposition  to,  is  contained  in  the  verb 
itself.  But  if  the  subject  be  not  a  pronoun,  the  verb  is  re- 
peated after  the  nominative,  thus  :  NVaveli  Jon  aveV  inlengi 
ye.  And  called  John,  he  called  his  disciples.  NVayimri 
Jisu  awiilinlia  wao.     And  answered  Jesus  and  said  to  them. 

In  the  above  sentence,  at  the  second  verb,  awulinlia,  the 
initial  a  makes  what  is  called  the  conjunctive  form  of  the 
verb,  which  form  is  in  very  frequent  use. 

Nouns  have  no  case  form ;  but  wherever  a  pronoun  is  the 
subject  of  a  verb  and  follows  it,  the  pronoun  takes  the  form 
of  the  objective  case. 

NV  awulinlie  wao,  and  he  told  them. 

NVawulinlio  ye  nla  wao,  and  was  told  him  by  them. 


64  MPONGWE    GKAMMAE. 

In  the  above  sentences,  one  active  the  other  passive,  the  e 
and  ye  are  both  subjects  of  the  verbs,  and  are  both  in  the  ob- 
jective form. 

When  the  subject  of  a  verb  is  a  noun,  and  comes  before  the 
verb,  the  personal  pronoun  uniformly  stands  between  the 
noun  and  the  verb,  thus  :  Angile  e  haTriba,  Angile  he  speaks. 
Sonia  e  janja,  Sonia  he  works. 

Mhonli  yi  re  vdvd,  the  goat  it  is  there. 

A  verb  seldom  follows  a  verb  (in  the  same  sentence)  in  the 
same  form,  though  all  be  in  the  same  mode  and  tense,  thus  : 
JV^do  rdndanV  ilovalooi  yanl'i^  hd  dende  mbia,  azunga,  but 
love  your  enemies,  and  do  good,  and  lend.  In  this  sentence 
the  first  verb,  rdndanli^  is  imperative  plural;  the  second, 
dende,  is  in  the  form  of  the  indicative  present ;  the  third, 
azunga,  is  the  conjunctive  form,  which  is  the  form  of  the 
imperative  sin.  with  a  prefixed.  But  frequently,  when  two 
or  tliree  verbs  follow  in  a  sentence  as  above,  all  in  meaning 
in  the  imp.  plu.,  the  second  takes  the  imp.  plu.  ending,  and 
the  third  is  in  the  conjunctive  form,  thus :  RdndanV  ilovalo- 
vi  yanli,  kd  dendanli  mbia  azunga. 

108.  One  peculiarity  of  this  language  is  the  very  frequent 
use  of  the  passive  voice.  The  natives  love  it.  Instead  of 
saying.  And  Jesus  rebuked  him,  it  is,  NVazembio  ye  nli  Jisu^ 
and  he  was  rebuked  by  Jesus.  Instead  of.  Whatsoever  thou 
shalt  ask,  it  is,  Ezdin'  edu  zi  he  'bambio  ndd,  Whatsoever  sliall 
be  ask5d  by  you.  JE  tondo  nVanlaga,  he  is  loved  by  the  peo- 
ple, and  not,  The  people  love  him.  Inya  si  nyo  mie,  food 
eaten  by  me. 

SALUTATIONS. 

109.  1.  Sali,  singular.  Salenli,  plural. 

2.  3Iholo,  singular.  Mholoanli,  plural. 

The  first  is  the  salutation  after  long  absence,  or  on  the  arri- 
val of  strangers.  The  host,  sitting,  receives  them  in  silence, 
until  all  have  been  seated  for  a  space  of  time.  He  then  gives 
the  salutation  or  welcome,  Salenli,  welcome.     They  respond, 


SYNTAX.  55 

Ai,  soli  he^  jea  !  welcome,  thou.  After  a  minute  or  two,  and 
perhaps  passing  a  few  words,  the  host  commences  the  common 
salutation,  Mholomili^  and  the  response,  Ai,  mbolo  he,  or 
mholoanli  he,  if  there  be  others  with  the  host.  If  there  be 
special  friends,  long  separated,  they  throw  their  arms  around 
each  other's  shoulders,  with  the  salutation,  Samba,  strongly 
accenting  the  final  syllable.  The  salutation  always  begins 
with  the  host,  never  with  the  visitor.  If  there  be  no  salutation 
there  is  mischief  intended.     Depart. 

If  tiiere  be  frequent  meetings  during  the  day,  the  pass-word 
is  aibio,  sin.,  abionli,  plu. 

ADIEUS. 

110.  31i  ahhidaga,  I  am  gone. 

Ai,  gendaga  Tnhiamhie,  yea,  go  prosperously. 

Mi  ahendaganli,  plu.,  I  am  gone  you. 

Ai,  gendaga  mMamhie,  yea,  go  prosperously. 

Asue  hendaganli,  plu.,  we  are  gone  you. 

Ai,  gendaganli  mhia/nibie,  yea,  go  ye  prosperously. 

ANOTHER   FORM. 

111.  3fi  ahia  go  tiginld  ojanli, 

I  have  come  to  leave  thee,  good-bye. 

"Mi  ahia  go  jpango.nla,  nVawe,  or  nVanlue, 

I  have  come  to  promise         with  thee,  or  with  you. 

The  response  is,  Gendaga,   or  gendaganli,  mbiamhie, 

Go  thon,  or  go  ye,  prosperously. 
Note  1. — In  the  above  salutation,  Mbolo  is  the  adjective  old, 
applied  principally  to  persons.     It  is  made  into  an  iri-egular  verb, 
imperative  mode,  and.  the  plural  is  a  regular  imperative  plural, 
3Ibo7oanli. 

Note  3, — The  Mpongwe  verb  for  salute  is  hogizya.  If  a^  person 
do  not  hear  or  heed  a  salutation,  he  is  told,  e  bogizyd,  he  salutes 
you ;  or,  mi  abogizya.  To  refuse  a  salutation  is  to  offer  the  grossest 
uisult,  and  a  slave  will  resent  it. 

NoT&  3. — If  a  person  be  going  to  King  George's,  another  will  say 
to  him,  Wogizya  mie  Renjugo.     Salute,  me  Renjogo. 
Or,  Wogizyanli  mU  anlaga  wi  re  vdvd, 
Salute  ye  me  the  people  who  are  there. 


56  MPONGWE   GT?AT\nvrAB. 

ELISIONS  AND   CHANGES   OF  YOWELS. 

112.  Reinarh. — Where  euphony  requires  it,  vowels  are 
elided,  or  coalesce.  The  elision  is  usually  made  of  the  final 
vowel  of  the  word  standing  first. 

VERBS. 

113.  A  verb  ending  in  «,  followed  immediately  by  a  noun 
commencing  with  a^  e,  i,  or  o,  elides  its  final  vowel. 

-£'  tond^  awanla,  he  loves  children. 

Venjavenf  agaml)  ainbia,  keep  good  words. 
AvMP  avia,  despise  not  the  good. 
,  £  sunginV  ikugi,  he  saves  the  poor. 
E  jiv'  ilasa,  he  knock  off  an  orange. 

Tl^^  tenV  ilcdndd,  they  are  cutting  a  plantain. 
Azue  Tcof  iddmM,  we  catch  a  sheep. 
Yag''  epioi^  bring  a  chair.  ' 
E  honV  epoholo,  he  puts  on  a  hat. 

0  heg'  erere  zmganli,  you  cut  another's  tree. 

Ge  diiV  okandci^  go  pick  cotton. 

A'bd)ij''  ofhenlo  we,  he  cut  his  finger. 

Punctuation^  or  anything  producing  suspension  of  voice,  or 
hiatus,  between  words,  obviates  elision  or  change  of  vowels. 

NOUNS. 

114.  Nouns  ending  in  a  elide  the  final  vowel  when  stand- 
ing next  an  adjective  commencing  with  a  vowel,  only  it  coa- 
lesces with  0  into  a  : 

Anlag'  awenge,  people  many.   • 
Aly  ainbia,  mangoes  good. 
Oma  ompolo,  is  Oin'  d'inpolo,  person  large. 
Ngw'  ogdi,  mother-in-law. 
Oni'  dmbia,  person  good. 
But  Owar'  ompolo,  canoe  large. 
Ozy''  onibia,  face  beautiful. 
Egar'  evolo,  chest  large. 
EzdrrC  evia,  a  thing  good. 


SYNTAX.  57 

Prepositions  are  usually  elided  for  euphony.  Oo  avienli 
anlaga  amdri  nli  elende  ezenle.  This  sentence  is  spoken, 
and  properly  wi-itten,  thus  : 

Ow'amenV  anlag'  amdri  nVelend'  ezenle, 

When  came  people        other      ivith  boit      other. 

In  Gw^  the  w  is  only  a  vinculum  in  place  of  o.  The  other 
four  contractions  follow  the  common  rule  of  elision. 

PRONOMINAL    ADJECTIVES. 

115.  IS'ouns  standing  next  before  pronominal  adjectives 
with  final  a,  change  a  to  *,  thus  :  igambi  nyam,  my  word  ; 
ivangi  nye,  his  law  ;  agdngt  masyo,  our  spears.  Bii^rather, 
agdng^  hnazyo  ;  Iga/niV  inyam  /  ivaiuj'  inye  y  thus  eliding 
a,  and  joining  i  to  the  pronoun,  where  it  belongs. 

I^ouns  terminating  in  other  vowels  remain  unchanged,  thus : 
ihdndd  nye^  his  plantain  ;  imenlo  yao,  their  lingers  ;  Owaro 
wazyo,  our  canoe  ;  Ozunge  wd,  your  Saviour.  But  wiite, 
ihdndd  ^nye,  his  plantain  ;  iinenlo  ^yao,  their  lingers  ;  Ozunge 
^wd,  your  Saviour.  For,  ask  a  man,  elende  zinld  za-mande  ? 
boat  this  whose  ?  He  replies,  izain.-^Ozyede  winld  waman- 
de?  this  spoon  whose?  He  replies,  iwd,  yours. ^  l^okolo 
ineyd  yamande  ?  whose  hats  those  ?  He  replies,  iyao,  theirs. 
Thus  the  *,  which  probably  belongs  to  the  pronominal  adjec- 
tive5»  in  the  first  examples,  has  been  transferred  to  the  noun, 
and  in  the  last  examples  has  been  elided.  These  ai'c  sug- 
gestions for  consideration. 

EWIKIA— Dakk  Sayings. 

116.  This  is  a  language  spoken  only  by  the  elders,  and  used 
only  in  their  secret  councils ;  though  the  secret  council  may 
be  held  in  open  assembly.  It  is  formed  by  changing  words, 
and  making  a  Babel.  Tree,  may  mean  a  fish  ;  water,  may 
mean  a  gun  ;  gorilla,  may  mean  a  ship,  and  life,  may  mean 
death.  And  the  verbs  are  transmuted  in  the  same  manner. 
No  cipher  telegrams  ever  equaled  it  for  confusion  and  ob- 


58  MPONGWB   GRAMMAK. 

scuritj.     And  no  man  under  twentj-iive  years  of  age  is  ini- 
tiated into  it,  and  then  with  the  most  binding  oaths  of  secrecy. 

GENEEAL  REMAEKS. 

IIY.  Although  these  Central  and  South  African  dialects  be 
flexible,  soft,  musical,  and  abounding  in  euphonic  concords, 
and  though  their  grammatical  structure  be  so  methodical,  con- 
sistent, and  uniform,  and  the  classification  of  the  substantives 
and  their  adjuncts,  and  the  conjugation  of  the  verl)S  be  almost 
unrivaled,  yet  it  is  not  claimed  that  this  is  the  perfection  of  a 
language  for  commerce,  the  arts,  and  sciences  of  a  highly  civ- 
ilized state  of  society.  But  the  present  form  of  the  M])ongwe 
language  is  amply  sufficient  for  all  present  necessities,  and  its 
pliability  will  doubtless  render  it  equal,  to  all  future  contin- 
gencies. Many  of  the  dozen  and  more  conjugations  will 
rapidly  fall  into  disuetude,  and  most  of  the  definite  pro- 
nouns will  be  dropped.  These  changes  will  come  gradually 
from  necessity,  and  not  by  revolution  or  revisions. 

The  pliability  of  the  language  is  seen  in  the  rapidity  with 
which  it  has  been  Christianized,  and  a  large  class  of  its  words 
adapted  to  the  expression  of  Christian  ideas  and  principles  in 
the  translation  of  the  whole  New  Testament  and  a  part  of  the 
Old,  and  is  readily  understood  by  the  people. 

118.  If  one  ask  how  the  language  of  the  Mpongwes  has 
been  cultured  to  such  grammatical  order  and  euphony,  it  will 
be  difficult  to  answer. 

119.  If  it  be  asked  how  it  is  kept  in  such  exactness  and 
purity  Mnthout  dictionary,  grammar,  spelling-book,  or  alpha- 
bet, there  is  a  ready  answer.  A  man's  standing  in  society  de- 
pends  uponhis  speaking  wel]L_and  that  includes  grammar, 
rhetoric,  ^ndelocution.  A  mother  never  allows  ungram- 
niatical  speech  or  inaccurate  pronunciation  in  the  child.  She 
says,  Epwi  wilnd,  chair  this.  The  instant  exclamation  of  the 
mother  is,  £Ji  o?f  wami  I  ngi  yd  mande  f  Oh,'  my  child  ! 
who  is  your  mother  ?  JEpwi  sinld,  putting  emphasis  on  sinld, 
that  is  not  easily  forgotten.     If  the  child  had  said  ofTienlo 


GENERAL    BEJtfAEKS.  69 

wmld,  this  finger,  it  would  have  been  correct.  But  epwi 
winla  could  not  be  tolerated,  except  in  a  foreigner  who  is  at- 
tempting to  speak,  and  he  will  be  tolerated  in  anything. 
Such  a  training  will  preserve  the  spoken  language  of  a  peo- 
ple in  its  purity,  better  than  all  the  dictionaries  and  gram- 
mars that  ever  were  written. 

120.  The  Proverbs  of  the  Mpongwes  form  a  large  part  of 
their  current  literature,  and  their  songs  are  never  exhausted. 

Solomon  spake  three  thousand  proverbs,  and  his  songs  were 
a  thousand  and  five.  But  there  is  little  probability  that  he 
originated  three  hundred  of  the  proverbs,  or  one  hundi'ed  and 
five  of  the  songs. 

Proverbs  originate  with  the  people,  and  probably  most  of 
them  in  the  more  primitive  state  of  society.  And  the  prov- 
erbs of  the  Mpongwes  are  worth  preserving. 


VOCABULARY 


MPONGWE  LANGUAGE, 


AMERICAN    MISSIONARIES, 


GABOON,  WEST  AFRICA. 


NEW  YORK: 
MISSION    HOUSE,    23    CENTRE    STREET. 

1879. 


MPONGWE  DICTIONAKY. 


Abe,  3  pi.     Burying-place. 
Abio,  pi.  abioni.      Salutation 

for  second  meeting  on  same 

day. 
Ahobo,  3  pi.     Lungs. 
Abol'e,  a.     Speckled. 
Abuhwe,  3  pi.     Yaws. 
Adune,  n.     Small  yellow  bird, 
Agali,  3  pi.     Oil,  vegetable  or 

animal. 
Agafiii,  v.     Hate,  ir.  and  def ., 

used  only  in  Indicative  Pres- 
.  ent. 
Agei,  a.      Fresh  (water),   see 

Nkei. 
Ay  audi,  3  pi.     Apprehension, 

anxiety,  sorrow. 
Aguga,  3  pi.      Trouble,  dis- 
tress, desolation. 
Ai.     Reply  to  the  salutations, 

"  Mbolo""  and  "  Abio." 
Aha,  3  pi.     Sap. 
Akdtdld,  3  pi.  dovi''  akdtdld. 

To  kneel  down,  let  set  the 

knees. 
Ahaga.     A  head- warrior. 
Ahete.      "Aghast,    pK     syum' 

akete. 
Ahe,  3  pi.     Laughter. 
Ake^a,  pi.  akcvani.      Thank 

you,  def.  verb  and  n. 
Ahoma.  A  head-wind. 
ATcidu,  3  pi.  V.    Bribe ;  pay  for 

buying   something    for   an- 
other. 
ATculu.     A  disease  of  fingers 

and  toes. 
Alatd,  3  pi.     Fellowship. 


Alugu,  3  pi.     Spirituous  liq- 
uors, palm- wine. 
AtnaraJi'anlo,  3  pi.     Forks  (of 

a  road). 
Amanli,  3  pi.     Grass. 
Amale,  1  irreg.  (s.  and  pi.  same). 

A  fabulous  kind  of  animal. 
Ambilie,  3  pi.     Modesty,  false 

delicacy. 
Ambe-nlingo,  3  pi.     Milk. 
Amenje,  3  pi.     Peace,  quiet. 
Ampandia,  3  pi.  '  Flood,  flow- 
ing (of  tide). 
Ampunli,  3  pi.     Foam,  froth. 
Ande,  rel.  prou.     What. 
Angola.  Scarlet,  colored  cloth, 

red  flannel. 
Aniko,  3  pi.     Swollen  hmbs 

from  rheumatism, 
Anlingo,  3  pi.     Water. 
Anlima       Apparition,      any 

strange  unaccountable  thing 

happening,  specter. 
AjnZwOj^  3  pi.     Money,  articles 
''^Srtrade,  sometiines  singular. 
Anka,   a.       Privately,     apart 

from  othors,  alone. 
Anlango,  3  pi.     Smell,  stench. 
Anti/d-vinld,  3  pi.    Sleep. 
Anlue,  pers.  pron.  2d  pi.    Ye, 

you. 
Anyafnia  ,  3  pi.     Ebb  (tide). 
Anyambie.  The  Creator,  God. 
Aionga,  n.     Former  time,  at 

first.  , 

Alongi  bosyo.     Persons  who 

have  died  before. 
Any  eg  e,  3  pi.     The  fringe  of 

a  cloth,  etc. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Aludofelia,  n,  A  tree,  the 
bai-k  of  which  is  used  in 
healing  wonnds.  1 

Ard,  a.  All,  whole,  entire, 
complete. 

Are,  n.     Poison. 

Arovi,  3  pi.  fx  torn.     Vomit. 

Asegd,  3  pi.     Foretaste. 

Asise,  3  pi.     Bashfnlness. 

Atdnlia,  a.     Spotted. 

Atd,  aux.  part.     Had. 

Ati\  3  pi.     Fipces,  excrement. 

AtinJa,  3  pi.  Stern  (of  boat, 
■  canoe,  etc.) 

Avende^  3  pi.     In  place  of. 

(  Take  a  hat  in  place  of  a  chest. 

1  wang'  opokolo  gwa'  vendo  m'  ogara. 

Avoro,  V.  ex."    Know,  def.   v. 

only  Indicative  Present. 
A  ronlo,  6  pi.     Skill,  cunning. 
Awangempondo,T\.    A  species 

of  antelope. 
Awdgd,  3  pi.     Palsy. 

A  fiyp  per.pron.  ad  sins.      Thou.  yoa. 
-T^<-c,    y^       ,.         .,    erop.  Thon, thyself. 

Ai/enjinla,  ad.  At  dav-break, 
early. 

Aye^  pers.  pron.  3d  sing.    He. 

Asue,  pers.  pron.  1st  pi.     We. 

Asuemc,  pron.     Ourselves. 

Asyingo,  3  pi.  Anguish,  ex- 
treme. 

Azyo,  6  pi.     jNIouth  of  a  river. 

Azyile,  3  pi.  Pain,  grief,  dan- 
ger. 

Asyigwazyigwa.  A  smaU 
scrub. 

B. 

Ba,  pL,  JBani,  ir.  v.  Here, 
take  it ;  mostly  in  offering 
a  thing. 

JBa,  ad.  Down ;  in  phrase, 
hola  ha,  tlirow  down. 

Baga,  v,  i.     Bring,  fetch. 


Baginlo,  v.   in.      T(»   have  a 

thing    brought    to   one   by 

chance. 
Bahdjolia,  ad.     All  about,  all 

over  ;  of  tracks  on  beach. 
Bala,  V.  t.     Inspect  ^i  farm); 

to  keep  watch  at  night. 
Bala.     Awake. 
Baha,  v.   i.     To   inquire  the 

piice  of  anything. 
Balca,  V.  t.     Kindle  (lire). 
BaJtU,  part.     To  stumble. 
Bakunta,    v.     t.       Intei-fere, 

meddle  ;  answer  for  another. 
Bainhioj,  V.  t.     Ask. 
Bamha,  v.  t.     Shine, 
Bamhiza,  v.  t.    Cause  to  shine. 
Baminlii,  v.  t.     Blaze. 
BaiTiinUa,   v.    t.      Cause    to 

blaze. 
Banda)mnla,  v.  t.     Be  care- 
ful of ;  mind. 
Banda,  ad.     Tight ;  fast. 
Banda,  v.  t.     To  have  sexual 

commerce  with. 
Bandiza,    v.    t.      Prostitute ; 
i      cause  to  commit  adultery. 
I  Bandanla,  v.  t.     Cohabit  to- 
t      gether,  man  and  woman. 
;  Bandisa,  v.  t.     To  make  fast. 
'  Bangatia,  v,  t.     Jam,  press, 

squeeze,    crowd ;    to   fasten 

with  button. 
Bango,  ad.     Cut  asunder. 
Bango   nla  hatigo.      Trading 

without  trust. 
Bdngunlia,  v.    t.     Separate ; 

divide. 
Bangwa,  v.  t.     Separate,  di- 
vide ;  be  apart. 
Bangwanla,  v.   i.      Separate 

from  each  other. 
Bana,  v.    i.     Be   suspended, 

hung  up. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONAET. 


Banlia,  v.  t.  (KeleheW).    Hang 

up,  suspended. 
Bara,  v.  in.     To  be   in   the 

hahit  of  doing. 
Baraba,  ad.     Near. 
Bare,  adverbal  verb.      Many 

times. 
Batia,  v.  t.     Join,  put  togeth- 
er, 
Bata,  ad.     Perched,  seated. 
Bataininla,  v.  i.     Ah'ght. 
Bate-mpira.    A  keg  ;  powder. 
Basa,  X.  t.  {Bazya).      Skin  ; 

cut  up  animals  and  birds. 
Bd,  a.     Alive. 
Bdhci,  ad.     Leaky. 
Bddia,  v.     Be  imgrateful,  ex- 
press ingratitude. 
Bdla,  V.   in.     To   get   up   at 

night,  to  seek  to  destroy  by 

witch  poison. 
Bali,  ad.    Clear,  quite,  wholly, 

entirely. 
Bdli,  ad.     Within. 
Bdnda,  v.  i.     Ripen  ;  red. 
Bdndia,  v.  cans.     To  ripen. 
Bdnda,  v.  i.  To  become  angry. 
Bdnjunla.    Finish  off  (a  canoe, 

etc.) 
Bdnla,  ^A.     Rot. 
Bdnja,  v.  i.     Cut,  wound. 
Bdnjanla,  v.   i.     To  be   cut 

with  knife  ;  wound. 
Bdra,  v.  t.     Wear  (clothes). 
Be,  aux.  v.     Will. 
Benga,  v.  t.     Name  of  a  tribe. 
Bega,  v.  t.     Fell  (tree). 
Bekelia,  v,  t.     Trust  in. 
Bela^  V.  t.     Want,  seek. 
Benda,  v.  t.     Be  angry. 
Bendiza,  v.  t.     Cause  one  to 

be  angry. 
Bendinla,  v.  t.     Be  angry  at 

any  one. 


Benga,  v.  t.     Follow. 

Bengwhi,  v.  i.  To  be,  or 
come  or  go  close  to  one. 

Benla,  v.  i.  Be  or  become 
hot.  boil  (water). 

Bcha,  V.  Stick  a  thing  fast, 
seal. 

Beria,  v.  To  allay  pain,  apply 
medicine,  stick  on,  as  a  plas- 
ter. 

Berinla,  v.  t.     Accuse  falsely. 

Bede,  t.  ad.  Indentation, 
bruised. 

Bedia,  v.  t.     Bruised  ;  indent. 

Behunia.  Divide,  break  in 
two. 

Behiva,  v.  i.     Divide  in  halves. 

Bmgtinla,  v.  t.  Define,  ex- 
plain, interpret. 

Benla,  v.  t.     Phmt,  bury. 

Beniba,  v.  t.  Watch,  (a  thief, 
etc.) 

Beta,  V.  t.  Name ;  call ;  sup- 
pose. 

Beta,  V.     Suppose,  mean. 

Beya,  v.     To  luff. 

Bia,  V.  i.     Come. 

Bika,  V.  t.     Hate. 

Bilia,  V.  t.  Preserve  the  re- 
mains of  a  meal. 

Bilia,  V.  t.  To  be  shy  of,  coy, 
reserved,  bashful ;  not  for- 
ward. 

Biiiibioj,  V.  t.  Respect,  rever- 
ence. 

Binda,  v.  t.     Knead,  mix. 

BindaJcanlia,  v.  t.     Mix. 

Blnla^  V.  t.     Skim. 

Bioga,  v.  i.     Belch. 

Biia.  To  stop  people  fight- 
ing ;  make  peace.  * 

Biviria,  v.  t.  Respect,  rev- 
erence, regard,  honor. 

Boj  ad.     Far  away. 


8 


MPOXGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Boanganya^  ad.     Arrived  at. 
£oba,    a.        Lop-sided,     one- 
sided. 
Bobiza^  V.  t.     Half  sheet. 
Boga,  V.  t.     Chew,  masticate ; 

to  crack  with  teeth. 
Boginla,    v.    i.      Cry   aloud ; 

bhister. 
Bogizya,   v.    t.      Salute    one 

with  "  MloloP 
Bogianla^  recip.  conj.     Salute 

one  another. 
Boka^  V.  t.     Bark. 
Bohci,  V.  t.     Dig  out  (canoe). 
Bohwa,  V.  i.  To  cave  in  (well) ; 

gi-ave  ;  open. 
Bolanganla^  v.  i.     l^oss  about, 

as  canoe  in  wave. 
BolinVohuw'   ihajpa   g^osaon. 

To  glory  in. 
Bola^  V.  t.    Whip,  ])eat,  strike. 
Bola   {njali).      Discharge    (a 

gun). 
BoJa  (as  ngdma).  Beat  (drum). 
Bola  (itu).     Crack  (a  joke). 
Bola    {epo).      Use    (indecent 

words). 
Bola   (ba),   v.   t.      To   throw 

down  ;  e.  g.,  ^  cow. 
Bola  {isapoga).     To  slap  with 

open  hand. 
Bola  {ikapa).     To  boast. 
Bo)jwa,  V.  t.     Arrive  ;  come  ; 

to  go  to  a  place. 
Boywa,  v.  i.    Appear  in  sight ; 

be  rich. 
Boijioa,  V.  i.     Leak. 
Boijwu,  n.     Loom, 
Bongu7nia,  v.     To  bubble  up. 
Bongunla^  v.  t.     To  bring  up 
*  an  orphan. 
Bongeni.     Bung. 
Bonda,  V.  t.    Concert ;  a  plan ; 

cum  Mondd. 


Bonla,  V.  i.,  lonVepoholo.  To 
put  on  a  hat ;  cover  a  house ; 
put  on  (liat). 

Bonla,  V.  t.     Empty,  pour  out. 

Bonlanla^  v.  i.  To  upset,  cap- 
size. 

Bonlio,  V.  p.  Be  empty  ;  des- 
titute of,  ahonlio  anliva. 

Bowunlia,  v.  t.  Appear ;  en- 
rich. 

Bozya,  n.  To  groan,  or  strug- 
gle in  death. 

Bosyo  (with  go).  Ahead,  be- 
fore. 

Bd^  or  ho,  a.     Alive. 

Bonga,  v.  t.,  or  hdnga.     Take. 

Bdnglnla,  v.  t.,  or  hon.  Take 
away,  deprive. 

Bongo  nValugu,  or  hdngo. 
Drunk. 

Bu,  ad.     Reclining,  down. 

Buehue  (with  go).    As  well  as. 

Bue,  a.     Dead. 

Bue,  a.  Open,  unobstructed, 
clear. 

Buha.     Strangle. 

Buhu,  ad.  Plainly,  openly, 
fearlessly  (of  speaking). 

Bukunla,  v.  t.  Speak  with- 
out fear,  boldly,  plainly. 

Bidia,v.t.,  Ja.  Say,  tell,  speak. 

Bunja,  V.  t.  To  break,  or 
follow  an  animal. 

Bunla,  vi.  Be  many  ;  abound, 
increase. 

Bunlia,  v.  t.  Make  to  be 
many,  multiply,  increase. 

Bunde.     A  small  insect. 

Bundii,  ad.     Upside  down. 

Bundtcnla,  v.  i.  Boil  (as  spring 
of  water). 

Bundunla,  v.  t.     To  stir. 

Bundahaida,  v.  t.  Break, 
spoil. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Biondakanla,  v.  i.     To  spoil. 
Bunya.     The  next  day. 
Bumha,  v.  t.     To  go  and  get 

a  wife. 
Bumba,  v.  t.     To  snatch,  as 

children,  food. 
BunibuUa,   y.  t.      To   scatter 

about  and  spoil. 
Buta,  V.  t.  Seelv. 
BurinUa,  v.  t.,  nVompisa.   To 

dash  one's  self  to  the  earth. 
Bwata,  V.  t.     To  touch. 

D. 

Da,  nda,  ad.     Long. 

Dadie,  ad.     Alone. 

Daga,    v.    i.       Chirp,    bleat, 

scream,  squall. 
Dagalaga^    v.   i.       Complain, 

grumble. 
Daginla,  v.  t.     Desire,   long 

for. 
Dalia,  Y.  i.     Cross  (river,  etc.) 
Bambe,  ad.     Soon. 
Daminla,  v.  t.     To  stretch  or 

reach  out. 
Banda,  v.  t.     Deny. 
Banda,  v.  i.     Creep,  crawl ; 

go  on  all-fours  ;  walk. 
Bandua,    v.    i.      To    be    re- 
deemed, redeem  one's  self. 
Bandunl'%,  v.  t.     Eedeem. 
Baginla,  v.  t.     Lose  utterly. 
Baia,  v.     To  meet. 
Batanla,  v.  i.  Meet,  assemble. 
Batiza^  V.  t.     Ciuse  to  meet 

or  assemble. 
Bava,  V.  and  a.     Tall,  be  tall ; 

long ;  be  distant. 
Baviza,    v.    t.       Make    tall, 

lengthen,  spin  out  ;  talk. 
Bavinla,  v.  i.     Extend,  reach 

after. 


Bavia,  v.   t.     Give,    entrust, 

bestow,  hand  to. 
Bavadavie,  ad.     Distance,  far 

away. 
Bd,  ad.     Silent,  still. 
Bd,  contra,  of  daJco.     Master 

or  mistress. 
Bddinla,  v.  t.     Peep,  spy. 
Bdga,  v.  t.     Curse. 
BfiMHa,  V.  t.    Bow  (the  head). 
Bdmba,  v.   t.     Conquer,   op- 
press. 
Bdminla,  v.  t.,  v.  i.      Sink, 

drown. 
Bdnddlia,  v.  t.     Flatter. 
Bdsya,  or  ddsyu,  v.  t.   Worth- 
less, as  fools. 
Bdva,  V.  t.     Fiah  (with  hook). 
Bdvdddvd.      Outer   or  great 

darkness. 
Bdmnla,  v.  i.     Keach  out,  as 

with  the  hand. 
Bega,  v.  t.     Stop,  prevent. 
Be?nha,  v.  t.     Taste,  try. 
Bemha  (as  mlenge),  v.  t.    Take 

aim. 
Bemha,   or   dembianla,  v.   t. 

Spar,  wrestle. 
Benda,  v.     To  do,  make. 
Benla,  v.  i.     Cry. 
Bevanla,  v.  t.     Forget. 
Bevinla,  v.  i.     Hope,   think, 

suppose  ;      seem     to     one's 

self. 
Bevinla,  v.  t.     To  impute. 
Be,  ad.    Quickly,  immediately. 
Beha,  V.    t.      Catch  (a   thing 

thrown). 
BeJa,  V.  i.  and  a.     Soft ;  weak. 
Beladela,  a.     Very  soft. 
Belisa,  v.  t.     Soften,  weaken. 
Bemhia,  v.  i.     Bow,  bend  the 

body. 
Bembiea^  v,  t.     Bend. 


10 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Dernhialenibia,  a.  Supple,  pli- 
able. 

DemMnlia,  v.  i.     Bow  down. 

Dhnhiaiila,  v.  i.     Kace. 

Denda^  v.  To  begin  to  go  up, 
as  the  tide. 

Denga,  v.  i.    Get,  find,  obtain. 

Dcnginlia,  v.  t.  Ileacli  up,  to 
a  thing  abov^e. 

Dengelia,  v.  t.  Disrespect, 
dishonor. 

Diano^  ad.    Apart ;  far  apart. 

Diana,  n.     Disposition. 

Dienga,  ad.,  or  die'  used  with 
Riga.   Alone. 

Dienga,  ad.  (with  tigd).  Let 
alone. 

Dimhinla,  v.  t.  Put,  place, 
lay  down, 

Dingilia,  v.  i.  Mark,  take  no- 
tice. 

Dinga,  v.  i.     Be  a  long  time. 

Dira,  a.     Heavy. 

Diria,  v.  t.  Honor.  Prov.  iii.  9. 

Diria,  v.  t.    Tie,  make  fast. 

Divinla,  V.  t.  Enclose,  sur- 
round, obstruct,  shut  out  and 
in. 

Diva,  V.  t.  Prov.  i.  14.  Be 
with ;  take  part  with. 

Doanla,  v.  i.    Live,  be. 

Dogunlia,  v.  i.  Go  away  quiet- 
ly or  secretly. 

Dogwa,  v.  i.  Fly,  leap,  bounce. 

Doha,  V.  t.    Knock. 

Dolo,  ad.     Seated ;  shine. 

Dorrihinla.  To  become  old; 
decrepid. 

Dominlia,  v.  t.  Begin  (a 
work). 

Dondoa,  ad.     High. 

Donga,  a.  and  v.  i.  First,  and 
Be  first. 

Dongo,  n.    SmaU-pox. 


Dovia,  v.  t.  Put  or  place  on, 
mostly  on  tire ;  set  upright. 

Dovalova,  v.  i.    Be  at  enmity. 

Dov,  ^ahdtdld,  v.  t.     Kneel. 

Dova,  V.  t.  (with  Mjpaga). 
Doubt,  bet,  dispute,  disbe- 
lieve. 

Dova,  V.  t.,  as  rJyale,  tune, 
erere.  Set,  put,  place,  es- 
tal)lisli. 

All  and  ad.,  at  all ;  with  sing  ; 


om'edu,  any  person  ;  ez&m^edu, 
y        anythinsf. 

Diiha,  V.  t.  Honor  (as  parent), 

as  subject  a  king. 
Duhwa,    V.  i.       Depart,    get 

away. 
Dud  a,  V.  i.     Be  weary. 
Dudia,  V.  t.      Cause    to    be 

weary,  tire. 
Duere.     Quiet.     Prov.  i.  33. 
Duha,  V.  t.     Butt,  strike. 
Dukanla,   v.    i.      Butt    each 

other. 
Dula,  V.  t.  Pluck,  pull  (Com.), 

to  pull  out  or  off. 
DuTnba,  v.  t.     Surprise. 
Dumhinla,  v.  t.,  i.  g.  dirnhinla. 

Put  down. 
Dufna,  V.  i.     Swell. 
Duminla,  v.  t.     Strive,  ago- 
nize. 
Duo,  V.  i.    Be  at  or  in  a  place. 
Dunlo,  V.  t.     Be   at   a  place 

with  another ;  find  one  there. 
Dura,  V.  t.     Pull,  haul. 
Durinla,  v.  t.     Attract,  draw 

to. 
Duvia,  V.  t.     Sop,  dip. 


E,  pers.  pron.,  A.    He  or  she. 
Ehdbago,  2.     Saw-fish. 
Ehaganlo,  2.     Resemblance. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


11 


Ehaka^  2  pa.   A  garden-knife. 

Ehandanlie,  2.     Adulterer. 

Ehanda^  2.     Skin. 

Ehaba^  2.  Any  worn-ont  or 
spoiled  thing. 

Embdngdinhdngd,  2.  Knee- 
pan. 

EheJce,  2.     Fire-place. 

Ehelahela,  n.     Precipice. 

Ehende,  2.     Corpse. 

Ehe,^.  An  herb?    (Gen.  i.  11). 

Ehe  Z'atanga.     Purslain. 

Ehole,  2.     Fist. 

Ehohe,  2.  Cripple,  so  can  not 
walk. 

EhoTco^  2.  Loins,  small  of 
back. 

Ehogonyo,  2.  Apparition, 
vision.     Luke  i.  22. 

Ehubu,  n.,  2.  A  bundle  of 
bamboo  leaves. 

Edddd,  2.     Eye  (of  needle). 

Eddsyu,  2.  Fool ;  vain  fel- 
low. 

Eddsyd,  2.     Foolislmess. 

Eddhu,  n.     A  small  fetich. 

I  Picture,  Ikeness  used  only 
of  persons;  for  tilings 
and  animals,  egdlanli  and 
mbondinli. 

Edingo,   2.      Crying,    scream- 
ing, "wailing. 
EdOi    2.      Bar   (at   mouth   of 

river). 
Edinga,  2.      Cassada  garden, 
corn  or  pea-nut  patch. 
/if^^  Editge,  2.     Cork,  stopj)le. 
,^  T^Eduka,  2.     Pistol. 
f>'  Edukatdnda,  2.  A  fruit, grows 
on  vine. 
-'Edungu,  2.     Great;  affair. 
Edurinlia,  2.    A  thing  which 

draws  another. 
Ejizaghige,  2.     Water-spout ; 

whirl-wind. 
Efu,  2.     Blanket. 


Efinlizya,  2.  Render  (as  money 
lent).' 

Efanga,  2.    Fear,  or  afraid. 

Efangiza,  2.    Cause  to  fear. 

Efelia,  2.     Cause  to  call. 

Egamhanyamhia,  2.  ISTon- 
sense. 

Eganlo^  2.  Fetish  (for  de- 
tecting adultery,  theft,  etc.) 

Egara^  2.     Cliest. 

Egdndd,  2.  Dependent ;  ward ; 
apprentice ;  disciple. 

Egdlanli,  2.  Likeness,  same- 
ness. 

Egdlanli,  2.  Leprosy.  See  Ga- 
it mli. 

Egdmha.  2.  Shave,  drawing- 
ing-knife,  etc. 

Egdmha,  2.  Parable ;  a  round- 
about reproof.  Nathan'  to 
David. 

Egdnga,  2  and  a.     Poor,  lean. 

Egdnli,  2.  Cascade,  cataract, 
ritie. 

Egdgdli,  2.  (See  ekalcali). 
Adam's  apple  (in  the  thro.it). 

Egero^  2.     An  ear  of  corn. 

Egenlizo,  2.  Measure,  with 
which  to  measure  quantity 
or  length. 

Egeza,  2.  '  Auger,  gimlet. 

Egege,  2.  "Tusk  of  ivory  weigh- 
ing less  than  20  lbs. 

Egenga,  2.  A  white  spot  on  a 
black  person, 

Egomhe,  2.     Time. 

Egomhogava,  2.  A  kind  of 
small  fish. 

Egorozimha,  2.  An  ear  of  com 
with  the  husk  on. 

Egoro,  2.    Sheath. 

Eguwa,  3.    A  fathom. 

Eguva,  2.  Snot;  cold  in  the 
head. 


12 


MPONaWE   DICTIONARY. 


Egionlu,  2.    Anger. 

Egwa,  2.     Kind  of  yam. 

Egwasya,  2.     Saw  ;  file. 

Egwaro,  2.     Trigger. 

Ehi^  2.  Throne,  king's  seat ; 
power ;  dominion. 

Ekaga,  2.     Land  turtle. 

Ekale^  2  and  a.  Pride  ;  con- 
tempt and  proud. 

Ekaka^  2.  A  load,  charge  of 
a  gun. 

Ekambie,  2.  Interpreter, 
spokesman. 

Ekanda^  2.  Tinder ;  also  a 
wild  animal. 

Ekasa,  ad.  To  scold,  speak 
harshly. 

Ekdkd^  2.     Cause,  reason. 

Ekdkdli,  2.     Adam's  apple. 

EkaiTi'mla,  2.  Peg,  pin  (of 
wood). 

Ekdga^  2.     Log,  fallen  tree. 

Ekdidd^  2.     Phlegm. 

Ekdngwe^  3.     Humpback. 

Ekdtd,  2.  Defense ;  pick- 
ets. 

EMikei,  2.     Lifant,  baby. 

Ehemhe,  2.  Animal  poison, 
venom. 

Ekenje,  2.     Intense  pain. 

Ekeva,  2.     Pity.     • 

Eko,  2.  A  kind  of  bituminous 
soil. 

Ekokore,  2.     Cock,  rooster. 

Ekoka,  2  {z'oJileTrhbe).  Honey- 
comb. 

Ekolo,  2.     A  kind  of  fish. 

Ekoiribasyanli,  2.  A  kind  of 
bird. 

Ekoio^  2.  A  quiver  for  ar- 
rows. 

Ekomho  {zi  njinla),  2.  A 
head  ;  gorilla. 

Ekotagota^  2.     Touching. 


Ekuka,  2.     A  thing  obtained ; 
a  beast  killed  by  chance. 

Ekuru^  2.     Owl. 

Ekumou,  2.     Stump. 

Ekwende,  2.     Fish  tail. 

Elasyi,  2.     Glass. 

ElarinU,  2.     Length. 

Elango,  2.     Hoop. 

Elanje,  2.     Proud. 

Eldgdli,  2.    Sting  (of  bee,  etc.) 

Eldmhe,    2.     Chat,    chit-chat,' 
con  versation. 

Elemba,  2.     Sign,  wonder. 

Elernhelembe,  2.      Large   leaf 
used  for  wrapping  up  food. 

Elerrdjo,  2.     A  useless  thing. 

Elende,  2.     Boat. 

Elengele^  2.   Poor ;  fool,  idiot. 

Elhige,  2.     Poor  ;  fool. 

Elendinla,  2.    Bow  (for  shoot- 
ing). 

EUiu,  2.     Beard. 

EUnga^  2.     Gown.  • 

Elingalinge,   2.     Corpse  car- 
ried out  to  burial. 

EUngilio,  2.     Mark. 

Eliwa,  2.     AVorld,  universe. 

Elivinli,  2.     Lake. 

Elivinli^  2.     Obstruction. 

Elida,  2.     Pond,  pool,  mud- 
hole,  lake. 

Eloko,  2.     Strong  vine. 

Elolo^  '2,.     A  fish  (resembling 
sardines). 

Elondivinli,  2.     Height. 

Elongo,  2.    Conflagration,  un- 
quenchable fire. 

Elova^  2.     Seine,  drag-net. 

Eluini^  2.     Fame  ;  report. 

Elumhago,  2.     Bracelet,  arm- 
let. 

Emama,  2.     A  kind  of  fish. 

Einenld,  2.     Life. 

Emondo,  2.     A  water  bird. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


13 


Endege,  2.     Large  flat  iisli. 
Endindi,  2.     Foetus  of  one  or 

two  months. 
Endondo,  2.     An  albino. 
EngaTnha,  2.     Demijohn. 
Engwamha,    2.      Scarcity   of 

meat. 
Enjanja,  2.     Brass  pan. 
Enimha,  2.     Secret. 
EnleMa,    2.      Lame    person  ; 

maimed  in  any  part ;  e.  g., 

the  eye,  leg,  arm. 
Enlingo,  2.  Tide  (ebb  or  flood). 
Elima,  2.     Badger. 
Enlami,  2.     Kich  man. 
Elime,  2.     Patch. 
Enlingo^  2.     Disease  supposed 

to  be  affected  by  the  tide. 
Enlomo^  2.     Dry  season  (ex. 

middle   of  May  to  middle 

of  September. 
Enungunla,  2.     To  open  the 

key. 
Enyarogolo,    2.      A  kind   of 

bird. 
Enyengenyenge,    2.      Bustle ; 

unsteadiness. 
Epa,  2.     Bone. 
Epanga^  2.     To  make. 
Epaga,  2.     Partition. 
Epe,  a.     Short. 
Epemhe^  n.     Saw  of  the  saw- 

flsh. 
Epe^  2.     Dagger  (poniard). 
EpUe,  2.     Plate. 
Epepa^  2.     Rudder  ;  fan. 
Epo,  2.     See  Bola. 
Epokwe^   2.      A   meddler    in 

others'  affairs. 
Eponga,  2.     Beeswax. 
Epoge,  2.     Wakefulness. 
Epcnnba,  2.      Boll ;    loaf   (of 

food). 
Eponga,  2.     Cover.  ^ 


Epongo,  2.  Gullet,  sesophagus. 
Epondoma,  2.     Pillow. 
Epondue.,  2.     Shorn  head. 
Epolcolo,  2.     Hat ;   small  flat 

basket. 
Epoti,  2.     Head,  pate. 
Epwi,  2.     Stool,  seat. 
Epwi  Katanga.     Chair. 
Eranga,  2.  Beauty  (of  person). 
Eranlia,  a.     Insane. 
Eraraaa^  2.     Kind  of  fish. 
ErenU,  2.     Half. 
Em'e,  2.     Tree. 
Ereria,  a.    Dreadful,  terrible. 
Ereihi^  2.     Axe,  hatchet. 
Eriga,  2.     Hollow  (in  a  tree), 
Eromi^  2.     Messenger. 
Erogora,  2.     Perspiration. 
Eroro,  2.     Cob  ;  skin,  rind. 
Eroviarovie,  2.     Nausea. 
Erdnge,  2.     Frog. 
Erumhe,  2.     Youth,  period  of 

youth. 
Eningu,  ad.     Secretly. 
Erungu,  2.     Con.,  maga.    A 

secret. 
E^adomba,  2.    Hill,  elevation. 
Esapala.    A  temporary  house ; 

booth. 
EsdMdd^    2.      A   spear   with 

round  iron  point. 
Eseha,  2."   Altar  ;  sacred  place 

where  idols  are  kept. 
Esekufha^  2.     Sob,  sigh. 
Esamha-tavoro.      Waiter  (at 

table). 
Eseku,  2.     Hiccough. 
Eserengila,  2.     Tale-bearer. 
Eshege,  2.     Bags,  old  cloth. 
^S3/«Z«,  2.     Tail  (of  bird). 
Esyalia.     Measles. 
Esydnga,  2.     Palm  ;  cabbage. 
Esydnge.     Hawk. 
Esyenginla-hama,  2.     Moth. 


14 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Esyivemhene.  A  larsje  water- 
bird. 

Esi/ove,  2.     Thirst. 

jEsioagenda,  2.     Bencli. 

Etamhedevinla^  2.    Indecision. 

Etatahaiigo,  3.  One  kind  of 
ant,  chiefly  on  oninge  trees. 

Etabwe^  2.     Small  fisli. 

Etada,  2.     Mat. 

Etdkuma.     Small  f)ird. 

Eteljomhe^  2.     Scorpion. 

Etenlo,  2.  Partition  (a  cross, 
a  honse) ;  end  of  house. 

Etinla,  2.   •  Bnttocdc. 

Etuta^  2.  Switch  end  of  cow's 
or  horse's  tail. 

Etomlenanga,  n.  Flannel 
shirt. 

Etuka^  2.  Husk  or  rind  (of 
plantains). 

Etumb^tiumhu,  2.  Part  of  a 
gun. 

Etumbangonja,  2.  "Whirl- 
wind. 

Eca^  2.    Limb  (of  one's  body). 

Ei^a.  2.     Phial. 

Eoanda,  2.     Tune  and  song. 

E'vagasa,  2.  Fin  on  the  back 
of  a  shai'k. 

Evcmga,  2.  Kind  of  wicker 
basket; 

Evango,  2.  Harpoon,  fish- 
spear. 

Evdvd.     Gizzard. 

Evangmili^  ad.  About  (in 
point  of  time). 

Evago.  Any  vessel  for  holding. 

Evas]jU7ila^  2.     Spi'it. 

Eve^  ad.     Bad. 

Eoemlja,  2.  Violent  person  ; 
courageous. 

Evendinli,  2.     Greatness, 

Evero,  2.  Place  to  water, 
spring. 


Eoenge,  a.  2.   Mane  (of  horse). 

Evede,  2.     Panting. 

Evevd.     Twine  made  of   th© 

plantain  leaf. 
Ecezyu,  2.     Sc^ar. 
EoeLesyi,  2.     Handkerchief. 
Ecere,^.     Meat;  fish. 
EveTYiba.     Strong,  brave  man  ; 

as  leader,  prince,  warrior. 
Evia.     Good. 

Evilo^  2.     Work,  calling,  oc- 
cupation. 
Evila,  2.     Ebony. 
Evindi,  2.     Cloud. 
Eviga,  2.     Men. 
Evisd,  2.     War-club. 
Emiidinla,  2.     Bowsprit. 
Edinlo^  2.     A  kind  of  tree. 
Evinlo,  2.   A  nap ;  sound  sleep. 
Evora,  2.     Wound,  gasli. 
Evonge^  2.     Indili'erence. 
Ecovedove,  2.     Adulteress. 

Evove,  2.     . 

ESovo,  2.     Adder,  snake. 
Evuginlia,  2.     Any  insect  or 

creeping  thing. 
Evunla,  2.     A  kind  of  fish. 
E&undunla, 

cut  f lom  the  iron  bar 
Evundu^  2.     Piece  or  chunk 

of  flesh  or  fish. 
Emmga^  2.     Epidemic. 
EPungu,  2.     Piazza. 
Educa^  2.     Jealously. 
Ewwrina.  2.     Garment  of  any 

kind  (an  old  word). 
Ewirie,     2.        Dark    saying; 

words  not  commonly  nnder- 

stood. 
Eioonjo^  2.     Head. 
Etvongolo,  2.     Wooden  bowl; 

buoy. 
Ewogonli,  2.     Wasp. 
Ewomha,  2.     Nape. 


A  large  slug 


MPONGWE   DICTIONAKT. 


15 


Ewole^  2.  Generous,  generos- 
ity of  mone'v. 

Ewofnarungidu^  2.  A  spotted 
lizard  (said  to  be  poisonous). 

Ewqga^  2.     Old  sits  of  a  town. 

Ewogo,  2  {e.q^  M  hora.  Place. 

Ewowa.     Bladder. 

Ewimihu,  2.     Firebrand. 

Ewulu,  2.     Chcifi',  trash, 

EyainhmVm,  2.     A  flood. 

Eyanjini,  '2i.  Ministration ; 
service. 

Eyare,  2.  Piece,  part ;  small 
quantity. 

Eyenlo,  2.     Mirror. 

Eyakd^  2.     A  kind  of  fetish. 

Eydle^  2.     Hard,  strong. 

Eydnga^  2.  Drunkard,  ine- 
briate. 

Eyogioe,  2.  Disposition  ;  hab- 
it, custom. 

Eyigo^  2.     Ked-wood. 

Esa,  2.     A  thing, 

Ezanga,  2.     Salt. 

Ezango,  2.  Book,  paper  ;  any- 
thing written. 

Ezangangowo^  2.     Book,  etc. 

Ezangahobo,  2.     Sole-tish. 

Ezancle,  2.     Int.  pron.    What, 


why. 

Ezalinla,  2 
Ezdmba^  2 

turtle. 
Ezdnibi,    '^ 


Comb. 

A  kind  of  sea- 


Sist: 


cousm 


re lative  too  near  fo  marry.  ~ 
Ezcima,  2.     Things  any  ma- 

teria]  thing. 
Ezdgardo,  2.     An  herb. 
Ezdnibdld,  2.     Broom. 
Ezemba,  2.     War-cap. 
EzenJi,  2.     Forehead,  front. 
Ezenya,  2.     Bait. 
Ezlga^  2.     Dwelling-place. 
Ezimla,  2.     Ant-hill. 


Ezyila,  2.    Bunch  of  palm-nut. 

Eziwo^  2.     Wild  goat. 

Ezyigo,  2.     Bed-wood. 

Ezo,  2.     Mortar  ;  mill. 

Ezyazya,  2.  Bamboo  fish- 
spear. 

Ezyenle,  2.     Landing-place. 

Ezlganingo,  2.  Small  red 
bird. 


Fala,  V.  t.     Castaway. 

Fa,  ad.     Away  (with  fala). 

Fata,  V.  The  whole  body  is 
not  well ;  unwell. 

Fatiza,  V.  Causing  to  be  un- 
well. 

Fatu,  n.     Stockings,  hose. 

Fafiga,  v.  t.  Escape,  run  away 
from  ;  run  away. 

Fa,  prep,  or  part.  Without 
position  (always  following 
the  noun). 

Fd,  ad.     Again. 

Fd  hunda.     Add  more. 

Fela,  V.  t.     Put,  place. 

Fela^  V.  t.  Breathe,  {feV 
0]]wei). 

Fella,  V.  t.  Call  (see  Fwelia, 
both  are  used). 

Fey  a,  v.  "i.     Grow. 

Fcva,  V.  i.  Be  or  become  bad  ; 
unpleasant. 

Feviza,  V.  t.     Make  bad. 

Fina,  V.  t.     Fold  (cloth). 

Finya,fwinya,  v.  i.     Return. 

Fwiniavinlia,  ad.  Returning 
the  same  day. 

Fd  or  fd,  prep,  and  ad.  With- 
out ;  always  follows  the  noun 
it  governs. 

Fu/na,  V.  Grunt,  strain  ;  bear 
down. 


16 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Fumavuma, 


V. 


Grumble, 


.complain. 
Fwelict,  V.  t.     Call  (see,  also, 

Felia). 
Fweia,  V.  t.     Call.   . 
Fweyiza^  v.  t.     Call ;  cause  to 

bo  called. 
Fwema,  v.  i.     Mistake,  err. 
Fwemiza^  v.  t.     Cause  to  err ; 

lead  astray. 
Fenla,.v.  i.     Be  cooked  prop- 
erly, done. 
Fwifii/a,   V.    i.      Return   (see 

Finia  and  Finya. 
Fwinizya,  v.  t.    lietum,  bring 

back. 
Fwinizya  ngaka.     Requite. 
Fwiza,  V.  t.     Turn. 
Fwizaviza,  v.     Stir  up. 

G. 

Ga,  aux.  V.  Must ;  only  with 
1st  and  3d  pers.,  but  both 
sing,  and  pliir. 

Ga^  ad.  and  conj.  As  ;  like  ; 
since. 

Gambeiile,  ad.  conj.  There- 
fore ;  then,  wherefore. 

Gare,  and  garegara,  1.  Mid- 
dle ;  inside. 

Gdlanli,  1.     Leprosy. 

Gdgwanli,  1.     Go  ye  out. 

Gchnha,  1.  As  {Orega)  scrape 
the  cask. 

(r(?,  conj.     Or. 

Gejild,  conj.     Or. 

Gevageva;  1.  Sorrow,  sadness ; 
sullenness. 

Giligili,  a.  and  ad.  True  ; 
truly. 

Gilido.     Flat-iron. 
yamhi,   1.    'Anger;    e.   g., 
egunlu. 


One-stringed 


yando,  1.     Alligator. 

yando,   1.      A  company  of 
persons  sitting  or  standing. 

yandij  1.     Envy,  envious. 

yango^  1.  ~  Medicine. 

yanja,  1.     Parlor. 

yomba.     Hedgehog. 

ydriihe.     Guano 

ydmhi,     1. 
harp. 

yd7ibi,  n.     Jibboora. 
Gogo,  ad.     There. 
Go,  prep,  and  ad.     To ;   at ; 

on  ;  in,  etc. ;  when  ;  where, 

etc. 
Gore,  prep.      To  (used   only 

before  persons  and'  pronouns 

referring  to  persons). 
Gore,  ad.    Standing  ;  straight. 
Gunlu,  ad.     Here. 
Gwanla.  1.      Comb  with  its 

honey. 
Gwaruenli,    1.  ■    Edge   (of   a 

tool). 
Gwenli,  ad.     Where. 
Gwi^  ad.     Where. 

I. 

Ihcb,  3.-  Fruit  of  the  Dika 
tree.     {Oho). 

Ihandaminla,  v.  n.  Care, 
watchfulness. 

Ibaginlo,  dinga  nVihaginlo. 
To  o-et  by  chance. 

Ihamoia,  v.  n.     Asking. 

Ihanda,  v.  n.  Sexual  com- 
merce. 

Ihanga,  n.     Morning. 

Ihangivanla,  v.  n.  Putting 
asunder. 

Ihaku,  3.  A  root ;  stone,  etc. ; 
used  with  Porno  nVibahu. 

Ihaka,  3.     Jungle. 


MPOJfGWE   DICTIONARY. 


17' 


IhaTTibo,  3.     Departed  spirit. 

Thando,  3.     Adnltere.^s. 

Ibdnddkd,  3.     Tadpole. 

Ihd,dia,  v.  n.     Ino;ratitude. 

Ihddle,  pi.  abddie. .  An  un- 
grateful person. 

Ihdnjcb,  V.  n.  Cut,  flesh 
wound. 

Ihdnja,  3.     Lizai-d. 

Jhdra,  v.  n.  The  act  of  put- 
ting on  clothes. 

/hdmhu,  3.  A  woman  taken 
away  by  force  with  a  fetish; 

Ihdnla^  v.  n.  Decaying  mat- 
ter. 

Iheha^  3.     Music-box. 

Ihekelia^  v.  u.  Faith  ;  trust- 
ing ;  coniiding  in. 

Ihe,  pi.   Evdl,  sin,  wickedness. 

Ihela,  V.  11.     Want,  desire. 

Ihmla,  V.  n.     Boiling. 

Ihenibe,  3.     Pigeon,  dove. 

Ihenda,  v.  n.     Anger. 

Ihsria,  V.  n.     Alleviation. 

Ihenla.     Planting,  burying. 

Iherinla,  v.  n.  Accusation 
(false). 

Ihehu,  3.  Half  a  round  thing  ; 
semicircle. 

There,  3.     Malagnette  paper. 

ihia,  V.  n.     Coming. 

I  hobo,  3.     Cowardice. 

I  hobo,  3.     Lung.    . 

Ibohu,  3.  Presence.  ^/"^  <7io' 
iboku,  he  is  present ;  lair ; 
place. 

Iboboti,  3.     Spider  (insect). 

Iboboboho,  3.  [  Coward,  cow- 
Ohobohobo,    \      ardiee. 

Thogizya,  v.  n.     Salutation. 

Iboginla,  v.  n.  Shout ;  crying 
out. 

Ihoko.  n.     Lare-e  cow  or  horse 

fly. 


Ihoha,  V.  n.  Barking  of  a  dog. 

(  A  bow  and  string;  breathed 

TTtn-frt     ^     J  upon  near  one  end,  and 

J.  uuoio,  o.    K  struck  with  a  short  stick, 

'  makes  musiQ. 

Ibotd,  3.     Poison,  witchcraft. 

Ibo7igamhala,  n.  Small  par- 
tridge. 

Iboga,  3.     A  bitter  stick. 

Ibongioa,  v.  n.     Aniving. 

Ibongunlia,  v.  n.  Cherishing  ; 
bringing  up. 

Ihongo,  V.  n.     Drunkenness. 

Ibd7iga,  v.  n.     Taking. 

Ibuku,  3.  Vexation  ;  chagrin  ; 
sensation  of  choking. 

Ihundunla,  v.  n-.     Mixing. 

Ibunga,  3.     Top-knot. 

Ibundakanliu,  v.  n.  Injur- 
ing, destroying. 

Idandunla,  v.  n.  Redeeming, 
redemption. 

Idaga,  v.  n.  Cry  out ;  scream ; 
bleat. 

Idaginla,  v.  n.  Hope ;  earnest 
expectation. 

Idagunla,  v.  n.     Answering. 

Iddmbe,  3.     Sheep. 

Iddnddlia,  v.  n.     Flattery. 

Idddd,  3.     Drop. 

Ido,  3  ;  pi.  ado.     Rocks,  stone. 

Ido  nyl  njali,  3.     Gnn-flint. 

Idoniinlia,  v.  n.     Beginning. 

Ido-nyi  porinlia,  3.  Grind 
and  whet-stone. 

Idudu,  V.  n.     Fatigue.' 

Idurinlia,  v.  n.  Drawing  to ; 
attraction. 

Ifera,  3.  JSTail  (of  lingers). 
(See  Omera). 

Ifwe.     Cold. 

Ifwefna.  v.  n.  Error,  mistake, 
sin.    . 

Igagum.a,  n.  3.     Stuttering. 

Igala,  3.  Street  (of  town) ; 
out  of  doors. 


(    cU. 


O-t-/-  L ' 


/ir. 


18 


MPONGWE   DICTIONABY 


Igelenge,  3.     Bell. 

Igamha,  3.     A  word. 

Igamha  mf  agwanla.  A  mo- 
ment. 

Igamho,  3.  Fine  (for  adultery). 

Iganda,  3.  Boldness,  inde- 
corum. 

Iga^  3.     Woods,  busli. 

Iganclo,  3.  Sole  (of  foot) ; 
paw  of  dog. 

Igctnja,  3.     Fish. 

Igddi,  3.     War. 

JgdldngA,  3.     Sea-sickness. 

Jgdma,  3.  Circle ;  circular 
spot ;  iirmament. 

Igdntbd^  3.     Land-crab. 

Igdnga.,^.  Spear;  with ^o  in 
honesty  and  truth. 

Igdgwlnlo,  3  ;  ex.  hdgioa.  A 
place  for  going  out. 

Igega,  3.     Seacrab. 

Igenle,  3.     Shell-iish. 

Igeva,  3.  ISTegro  dance ;  mirth  ; 
exaltation, 

Igedu,  3,  {igti).  Bundle  of 
meat  tied  up  in  leaves,  or 
anything  else. 

Igenga,  3.     Swarm  (of  bees). 

Igero,  3.  Part,  side,  division. 
Adunga  azye  gw'  igero  zi 
Mpongwe,  are  gid'  igero 
oil/  i'mimse. 

Igende^  3.   Errand,  messenger. 

Igeveli^  3,     Sprain,  strain. 

Jginji,  a.     Awkward. 

Igogo^  3.     Long  coarse  grass. 

Igomi,  3.     Ten. 

Igogosijo,  3.  Carpenter's  plane. 

Jgonlinlo,  3.     Market-place. 

Igonla^  3.  Stature  ;  height  of 
persons  and  things.^ 

Igonlo^  3.  Top,  summit,  high, 
aloft. 

Igolo^  3.     Trade. 


Igomhe,  3.     A  mat  sail. 

Igomhegojnhe,  3.     Umbrella. 

Igomhegowa^  3.     Large  iish. 

Iguva,  3.     Bellows. 

Igumha,  3.     Cargo,  effects. 

Tgiunic,  3.    Hope,  expectation. 

Igiiwu,  3.     Pineapple. 

Igurugaru,  3.     Turkey. 

Iguge^  3.     Door. 

Igidakdha,  3.     Rock-crab. 

Igwanla,  3.     Spittle.    " 

Igioera,  3.  Notch,  mark,  hour, 
pound. 

Ijanjinla,  v.  n.     Service. 

Ijmija,  v.  n.  Work,  labor, 
toil. 

Ijaihla^  V.  n.    Birth,  begetting. 

Ijarua,  v.  n.     Split,  rcn^.. 

ijdwa,  V.  n.     Hesting. 

Ijdmbwa^  v.  n.     Brightness. 

ijdgd^  V.  n.     Sickness. 

Ijdla^  V.  n.     Strength. 

IJegh'ie,  v.  n.  Shaking  of  the 
hips. 

Tjemha,  v.  n.     Singing. 

Ijenja^  v.  n.     Day-breaking. 

Ijellzo^  V.  n.     Lnprisonment. 

IjeJci'lia,  V.  n.     Judging. 

Ijeha.     Easing  off  ;  slaking. 

Ijeza,  V.  n.  Leaning  upon ; 
trusting. 

Ijiga,  V.  n.     Inheritance. 

Ijivira,  V.  n.  Believing,  will- 
ingness. 

Ijinga,  v.  n.     Healing,  curing. 

Ijinginla^  v.  n.     Entering  in. 

Ijordia,  v.  n.     Filling. 

Ijongmlia.     liemem  bering. 

Ijonla,  v.  n.     Killing,  cost. 

ijomha,  V.  n.     Marriage. 

Ijumbunlo,  v.  n.     Gliding. 

Ijufa^  V.  n.     Stealing. 

Ijuioa,  V.  n.     Death. 

Ijimlo,  V.  n.     Bereavement. 


MPONGWE   DICTION AET. 


19 


Ijuwe,  n.     Gray  hair. 

Tka,  3.     Meteor. 

Ikarnba,  v.  n.  Speaking,  ex- 
istence. 

Uvainbinla,  v.  n.  Speaking 
to,  or  for  some  one  ;  prayer. 

Ikanda,  a.     Acid. 

Ikaga,  3  ;  pi.  Akaga.   Leader. 

Ikanga^  3  and  a.  Baldness, 
bald  ;  frying. 

Ikanla^  3.     Miracle. 

Ikanganla,  v.  n.  "Walking 
about. 

Ikasya,  3.     Bridge. 

Ikataka^  3.     Bunch. 

Ikazya,  3.  Bed-water  ;  ordeal. 

Ikd,  3.  A  knot  in  tying  on 
bamboo  to  a  house. 

Ikdgdrd,  v,  n.     Snoring. 

Ikdnibizo^  3.     Bersecutioii. 

Ikdminla,  v.  n.     Nailing. 

Ikdndd,  3.  Bunch  of  plan- 
tains. 

Ikdte.     Question. 

Ikdtd^  3.     Kind  of  bamboo. 

Ikeva^  V.  n.  Conquering,  ex- 
celling, victory. 

Ikenga,  v.  n.  Heaping,  pre- 
paring. 

Ikesyipk  pi.  and  a.  Want  of 
nerve  ,v  mercy  ;  merciful ; 
tender-heartedness.  (Some 
have  ekeva,  and   have  not 


Ikeso,  a. ;  pi.  akeso.  Squint- 
eyed. 

Ikendo^  3.     Fire-steel. 

Ikenge,  3.     Skill. 

Ikeke,  v.  n.     Cackling. 

Ike.     Egg. 

Ikiekd,  3.  Perverseness,  con- 
trariness. 

Ikika,  3.     Only  child. 

Ikika^  ad.     Only,  alone. 


Ikilikili.     Heavy    tramping  '•> 

stamping. 
Ikonli.     Fire- wood. 
Ikonda,  3.     (See  Okondo). 
Ikomhinla.     Hem,  binding. 
Ikojpa,  3.     Jar. 
Ikora^  V.  n.      Tying,  band. 
Ikoko,  3.    Sugar-cane  ;  sugar. 
Ikota,  V.  n.     Catching. 
Ikowa,  3.     Thick  lish. 
Ikosyo,  3.     Leg  (of  fowl  and 

bird). 
Ikudukwe,  e.g.,  neganega  (ap- 
parently an  ad.)     Quickly. 
Ikiiku,  3.     Sail. 
Ikuoidu,  3.   Nest  (of  fowl  and 

bird). 
Ikunda^  v.  n.     xVddition. 
Ikungula,  v.  n.     Growling. 
Ikulu,  3.      6^Mj'  ^Kulu.     An 

arm  cut  oti. 
Ikumhu,  3.     Claw  (of  crab). 
Ikutu,  3.     A  narrow-mouthed 

basket. 
Ikweliki,     3.        Betrothment 

money. 
Ikwhityuiva,  4.   A  wild  plum, 

black  ;  grows  in  clusters, 
Ikweta^  3.    A  bend  in  a  river ; 

bay  ;  harbor. 
Ilalinio,  3.      Ford,  crossing- 
,    place. • 
Ilanga,  3.     Lily. 
Ilasa^  3.     Orange. 
lldwd,  3.     Fish-hook. 
Ildndd,  3.     Fresh-water  crab. 
lldtd^   3.      Mate;    second   in 

power. 
Ildld,  3.     Pawpaw. 
Ilende,  3.     The  saddle  on  the 

roof  of  a  house. 

/  A   Flecper.      Poisonous 

TT^      T^    n      )  slime  from  the  sting  of 

Ilende,  6.    <  tlie  ray-fish  ;  spittle  or 

J  mucus  that    dries   on 

\  the  cheek  of  any  slime^ 


20 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Ileve,  3.     Palm  (of  hand). 

lliria,  3.     Knot. 

Iloa/iilo,  3.     Dwelling  place. 

Ilombo.     World  of  Spirits. 

Tlosi,  3.     Lime. 

Tmama,  v.  n.  Amazement ; 
astonishment. 

Jmd7idd,  3.     Caterpillar. 

Jnianlo,  3.  Things  gotten  by 
robbery ;  obtained  without 
work. 

Jmamisa,  v.  n.  That  which 
causes  astonishment. 

JmaiTiu,  3.     Dumb. 

Imagl,  3.     Mug ;  pitcher. 

Imdga^  v.  n.     Backbiting. 

Iinhcda,  3.     Hammer. 

ImMngi^  3.  A  head  yf  wheat, 
etc. ;  a  long  feather  at  a 
cock's  tail. 

Imerna^  v.  n.    Acknowledging. 

Imhugu,  n.     Cheek. 

Itnepa^^.w.  Mepejenlo.  Beau- 
ty in  looking  ;  beautiful- 
looking. 

Imunga,  3.     Loaf ;  ball. 

hnjpmita.     Dagger. 

Imtingure,  3.  A  fruit,  grows 
in  clusters  on  vine. 

Ina,  3.     Name. 

Inlanlo,  3.     Bed 

Inctka,  V.  n.     Care. 

Ind,  3.     Tooth. 

Indnyigioemljolo.     Lightning. 

In dd.    Secret  society  of  males. 

Ingongo^  3.     Tin^any  vessel  . 
of  tin ;  zinc,  etc. 

Indctun.     Elastic. 

Indaandua,  3  ;  pi.  Anduan- 
dua.     Bubble. 

Ingeyd,  3 ;  pi'.  Angeydn.  A 
kind  of  trap. 

Jnlinli^  3.     Liver. 

Jgeidn^Z.  Gin ;  trap ;  deadfall. 


Inlipdti^  3.     Iron-pot. 

JjiUm,  3  ;  plu.   Money ;  goods 
Tft'or  barter). 

In  iro,  S.    IBoh  dage . 

Inlxanda,  pi. ;  Uhanda,  sing. 
Purposely;  intention. 

Inlanga^  3.     Moonlight. 

TrddugA^.   Nation;  kingdom. 

Inle^  coiij.     Saying. 

Inlinla,  3.  Shadow  (of  per- 
son) ;  soul ;  spirit. 

Tningo,  3.  Water ;  plu.  An- 
lingo. 

Inoana,  3.     Debt. 

Trwki,  3.     Lie  ;  falsehood . 

Intyd,  3.  Eye  ;  grain  (of  com, 
etc.) 

Intya  ny''  atanga.    Telescope. 

Intydnll,  3.     Tear. 

Intyime^  3.     Monkey-apple. 

Inu.  Fire  (made  for  cooking) ; 
fire-place ;  stove. 

Inumha,  v.  n.  Hatred ;  ani- 
mosity. 

Inyanga^  3.     Lake  ;  authority. 

lnyanli^2>\  'p]/AmanU.  Grass. 

Inyomfodo,  3  ;  pi.  Ainommilo. 
Altercation ;  quarrel. 

Imydngi^  3.  Drunkard  ;  wine- 
lubber. 

Inyenli.,  3.     Glutton. 

Inyengd,  3.  Post  which  sup- 
ports ridge  -  pole,  etc.,  of 
house. 

Inya^  v.  n.  __Foo(L 

Tnye.n.a,  \]~T\.     Gain;  profit. 

Inyanla^  3 ;  pi.  Afrianld^T^^mi ; 
charcoal. 

pi.    Afhemba. 


Inyeniba,    3  ; 

Poison. 
Inyeine,  3 ;  pi 
Inyingila,   3 ; 

Live- coal. 
Inyoi,  8  ;  pi.  Anioi.    Yoice. 


Am.     Foetus. 
pi.  AfuingUa 


/ ^- —  ^jc/1  e_5 /"-'<' '^^ 

Ipa^,  n.  -£a,y ;  wages  j  bire. 
J^ia^.    Flock  (of  birds) ;  herd 

(of  cattle)  ;  shoal  (of  tish). 
Ipaginla.    Charge  (for  gnu  or 

,  pip."); 
Ipahiha,  v.  n.     Beginning. 

Ijpciki^  3.  Cap  (for  man  or 
boy). 

Ijpomha.     DiaiThoea. 

Ipanginla.     Government. 

Ij)cmda  {enlingo  s'  ajpandi). 
The  tide  is  running  or  com- 
ing up, 

Ipazanganla,  v.  n.   Scattering. 

Ipahu^  3.  Blind  person ;  blind ; 
{a)  blindness. 

Iva,Qa.     Prophecy.   ■ 

Ipdndia,  v.  n.     Dissembling. 

Ijpamu,  3.  With^fs  or  tdwa^  a 
challenge. 

Ipedia,  v.  n.  Ingult;  disobe- 
dience, 

Ipesyi,  3.  An  affair;  occnr- 
rence. 

Ip%  3.     Armadillo. 

tpi.  Painful  swelling  on  arms, 
hands,  or  feet.  '• 

Tpinja,  v.  n.  Choice ;  prefer- 
ence. 

Ipivia^  V.  n.     Thinking. 

Ipikila,  V.  n.     Thinking. 

Ipunju,  Y.     Brains. 

Isusa  {Pusyd).  Accident,  with 
{nU)  accidentally. 

Ipote^  3.     Disease  of  skull. 

Ira^  3.     Hip. 

Irandi,  3.     Oyster. 

Irdga,  3.     Kind  of  yam. 

Irdrd,  3.  Navel  ;  step  (of 
mast). 

Irevo,  3.  Smart ;  smartness 
(of  pain). 

Irende^  3.     Thorn. 

Irigo,  4;  pi.  ^TiginV  irrigo. 


piCTIONAEY. 


21 


Make  a  will.  Ezango  z' 
irigo. 

Irinla,  3.  A  pod  (of  ground- 
nuts). 

Iroki,  3.     Button, 

Iroanlo,  3.     A  burden. 

Iroiida,  3.  Favorite  ;  one 
loved  much. 

Isamba^  3.     A  kind  of  crab. 

Isavinla,  v.  n.     Worshiping. 

Isapoga,  3.  A  slap  with  open 
hand. 

Isanti,  3.     Shot;  ball. 

Isdsdgdld.     Measles. 

Isdva,  V.  n.     Sorrow. 

Iscge.     Entrails. 

Isenda.     Dizziness. 

Isyangu,  5.  A  hankering 
after  meat. 

Isydhd,  3.  Crumbs  of  tobacco 
left  in  the  pipe  after  smok- 
ing. 

Isydld,  3.  ]S^eed,  care,  regard, 
respect. 

Isyundd,  3.     Dwarf. 

Isyinga,  3.     Deer-net. 

Isyukd.  A  wife  lent  to  a 
guest. 

Isuminlia,  v.  n.     Praise. 

Isyusya,  3.  Wadding  (for 
gun). 

Isyangcda,  3.     Window. 

Isydngd,  3.  Pain  of  pai-turi- 
tion. 

Ita,  3.     Bundle. 

Itakwe,  3  ;  ex.  tahilia.  Testi- 
mony (mostly  plural),  narra- 
tive, or  things  narrated. 

Itataminla,  v.  n.     Trembling. 

Itanda,  3.     Mangrove  tree. 

Itambe,  3.     Paw. 

Itemiza,  v.  n.     Temptation. 

Itenla,  v.  n.    Cutting,  harvest. 

Itia,  V.  n.     Fear. 


22 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Itita^  3.  Scratch  (with  finder) ; 

pimples. 
Tti mbiarimhia^  v.  n.    Stagger- 

ing. 
liomha,  v.  n.     The  removing. 
Itdnda,  v.  ii.     Love. 
/tua  {swaJca  yire  tua).     The 

knife  is  sharp  ;  edge  (of  tool). 
Itu,  3.     Joke,  fun. 
Itula  {iremi  zi  re  tula).    The 

axe  is  not  sharp. 
Itutii.     Palm-wine. 
Itimlia,  V.  n.     Shortening. 
Ivari^    3  ;  pi.    amp.     Bough, 

limb,  l)ranch. 
Ival'wa.     Scales,  crumbs. 
Ivanga,  3  ;  pi.  amp\     Law. 
Ivango.,  3.     Reins. 
Ivaiili,  3  ;  pi.  amp' .     A  place 

where  a  canoe  is  made. 
Iva.va,  3  ;  pi.  amp.     Wing. 
Ivazya^  3 ;   pi.  amp.     Twins 

(mostly  pi.) 
Ivdhd,  3,  amp\     A  knot  in 

tree  or  board. 
Ive.     Wine. 
Ivemha.,   3,   amp.      Hole   (in 

ground) ;  big  pit,  or  little. 
Ivela.,   pi.    amp^   3.       White 

plain  cotton  cloth  ;  bafts. 
Ivenda.,  pi.  amp*.     Greatness, 

government,  glorv,  rule. 
Iveoenli,  3,  amp\  Thigh. 
Ivenginlo ;    pi.   amp-.     Place 

of  waiting. 
Ivenge^   3,   amp\     Corner  of 

cloth. 
Jvenga.,   3 ;  pi.    am2)\     Tune 

and  song. 
Ivmli,    3  ;    pi.   amp''.      Lat ; 

mammary  gland. 
Iviri.^    3.       Shade ;     Shadow 

(not  of  a  persc>n). 
Imimhize.     Kind  of  ants. 


Ivokinlo.,^\.  amp:  ex.  poka. 

A  place  tliat  niay  be  waded ; 

a  ford. 
Immho,  3,  amp.     Boil. 
lootTla,  3,  ampofila.     Men  of 

the  same  age  ;  generation. 
Ivogo,  3,  amp.     Hole  through 

anything. 
Ivuva^  3,  amp.     Knee. 
Imiva.,  3.     Jealousy. 
Ivuginlo,  3,  amp.  Anchorage. 
Imigiza.     Stingily. 
Iimnli.     Frotli,  Gcum. 
Twanjd,  3.     Young  man. 
Twdga,    3.      Mourning  ;  wail- 
ing (for  dead). 
Iwcild^  3 ;  pi.  anib.     Bamboo 

swamp. 
Iwdra.,  3,  amh.     Pair ;  suit  of 

clothes. 
Iwenle.  3,  avil).     Breast,  teat. 
Iioola,  3,  amb.     A  stroke ;  a 

charge  of  powder  or  shot. 
Iioomhi,  V.  11.     Obscurely. 
Iioomi,  3,  amh.     A  blister. 
Iwongo,  3.     Bottom. 
Iwugu,  3,  amh.     Cheek. 
Iioumt,    3.      A  place   of  dry 

soft  sand. 
Iwumn,  3.     Belly,  womb,  etc. 
lyela,  3.     A  dirt-heap. 
lyeye,  3.     Cramp;    sleep    (of 

a  limb). 
Tyarinlo,    3.       Foot-stool ;    a 

place  often  trod  upon. 
lyinginlio.,   3 ;    ex.  jlnginla. 

An  entrance  way. 
lyumhunlo.,  3.     Hiding-place, 

seci'et. 
Izanga.,  3.  A  place  for  a  house ; 

and  the  vacant  place  after 

a  house  has  been  removed. 
Izauzau,  3  and  a.     Brackish- 

ness,  sour. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


23 


Izyacje^  3.     Duck. 

Izungahanlo,  3.     Chain. 

Izyunga,  3.  A  noose ;  slip- 
knot. 

Tsiiali,  3.     Virgin,    i-^-  'laur=>  • 

Isydmbunlo,  3.  Hiding-place 
for  a  person. 

Izyeva,  3  ;  pi.  azy.     Play. 

Isyigo,  3.  A  tree  and  its 
fruit ;  a  purple  plum. 


J. 

Ja^  conj.     If. 

Jaga,  v.  t.     Plaster  a  crack. 

Jagima,  v.  i.     To  awake. 

Jagunla,  v..i.     Creep. 

Jagiayagia^  v.  i.  To  be  spread 
abroad  (as  news,  fame). 

Jajangwe,  ad.  Soon,  present- 
ly ;  by  and  by. 

Jaka,  V.  i.  Hitch ;  be  caught ; 
become  entangled. 

Jakiza^  v.  t.  To  cause  to  be 
caught. 

Jamha^  v.  t.  Cauterize,  cor- 
rode. 

Jamhiza,  v.  t.  To  cause  to 
corrode. 

Jamhtinlia,  v.  t.  Overflow  as 
a  flood. 

Jaminla,  v.  i.  Move  to  lee 
side  of  boat. 

Janga,  v.  t.     Singe. 

Janlia,  v.  t.  Spread  (as  a  cloth) 
in  sun. 

Janja,  v.  t.  Work,  perform, 
do. 

Janjinla,  v.  t.  Work  for; 
serve. 

Janla,  v.  t.  Beget ;  bring 
forth  ;  bear  (fruit). 

Janginlia,  v.  t.     Melt. 

Jangmlia.  v.  i.     Float. 


Java,  V.  t.  Tread  upon ; 
trample. 

Jarua,  v.  t.     Be  split. 

Jarunla^  v.  t.     Split. 

Jasa,  v.  i.     Be  tried,  weary. 

Jasiza,  V.  t.     Tire,  weary. 

Jao,  ad.     Yesterday. 

Jazya,  v.  t.     To  sneeze. 

Javura,  v.  i.  and  a.  Be  or  be- 
come light ;  not  heavy. 

Javuria,  v.  t.  Light'en ;  assist ; 
make  light  of. 

Jaza,  V.  i.     Sneeze. 

Jdgcl     and    Jd,      conj.      If. 

(J(5t  becomes  J(i  when  it  precedes  a  vowel 
witu  which  it  coalesces). 

Jdgd^  V.  t.     Hear ;  feel. 

Jdgd^  V.  i.     Be  sick. 

Jdgizii,  V.  t.  To  cause  sick- 
ness. 

Jdginlo,  v.  t.  Obey ;  rel.  conj. 
of^'^^«. 

Jdga,  v.,i.  Swim.  Oydgisyi, 
swimmer. 

Jdla.^  V.  i.  Hard ;  strong ; 
tough,  etc. 

Jdliza^  V.  t.  Harden ;  strength- 
en ;  toughen,  etc. 

Jdlinla,  v.  t.  To  resist  any 
one. 

Jdmhunla^  v.  t.     Sweep. 

■Jdmhua,  v.  i.  and  a.  Be  bright ; 
shine. 

Jdivthunlia^  v.  t.   Make  bright. 

Jdmhuiza,  v.  t.     Brighten. 

Jdnja,  V.  t.  Nurse;  cause  to 
suck,  or  give  to  drink. 

Jdnla,  V.  i.  and  v.  t.  Laugh ; 
laugh  at,  etc. 

Jdnli^  ad.  Day  before  yester- 
day. _ 

Jdwa,  V.  i.     Kest. 

Jdiounla,  v.  i.     Pant» 

Jega^  v.  i.     Blossom. 


24 


MPONGWE   DICTIONAKY. 


Jega,  v.  t.   Get ;  obtain  money 

or  trust, 
Jeginla,  v.  t.     Trnst. 
Jegeria,  v.  t.     Stir  up. 
Jegeria,  v.  i.    Dance ;  wriggle ; 

shake  hips  in  dancing. 
Jeha,  V.  i.     Slacken ;  abate  (as 

wind). 
Jekiza,  v.  t.      Slacken  (as   a 

rope). 
Jekanla^  v.-  t.     Mingle  blood 

of  tribes  in  making  treaty. 
Jeka^  V.  t.      With  njeka,  to 

make  a  treaty  covena'iit. 
Jela,  V.  i.     Be  in  distress ;  dif- 
ficulty. 
Jeliza,  V.  t.    Distress  ;  punish. 
Jemha,  v.  t.     Sing. 
Jema,  v.  t.     Awake  a  person, 

but   the    person    (endngun) 

awakes. 
Jemisa,  v.  t.    Awake ;  to  send, 

a  second ;  to  awake,  a  third 

person. 
Jenja^  v.  i.     Dawn. 
Jenjiza^  v.  t.     Cause  to  dawn ; 

enlighten. 
Jenla^  v.  t.     See. 
Jenla,  v.  t.,  with  ntydnli.    Be 

ashamed. 
Jenla^  with  rjcindi.   Be  envious 

at. 
Jenlanla,  v.  i.    See  each  other. 
Jenliza^  v.  t.     Cause  to  see. 
Jenla,  with  eheva.     Pity. 
Jezya,  v.  t.  or  v.  i.    To  cast,  as  a 

wave  a  boat ;  go  to  leeward. 
Jesya,  v.  i.     Lean  ;  incline. 
Jezya^  v.  t.  *  Wag  the  head ; 

deride. 
Jegeria,  v.  t.     Add  firewood. 
Jekelia,  v.  t.     Judge  persons. 

(See  Tenliza). 
Jengeria,  v.  t.     Wait  for. 


Jerua,  v.  i.     To  turn  aside  out 

of  the  road. 
Jiga,  V.  t.     Choke. 
Jig  a,  V.  t.     Inherit. 
Jila,  V.  i.     Decline,  as  day. 
Jilanganla,  v.  i.     Be  or  be- 
come black ;  dark. 
Jilanganlia,  v.  t.      Blacken  ; 

darken. 
Jila,  V.  i.     Incline  to  one  side 

(as  a  boat) ;  tip  ;  overturn. 
JiUzya,  V.  t.     To  destroy. 
Jilinlo,  V.  t.     Dream. 
Jilinlo,   V.  t.  {Nyilinld).     To 

dream  a  dream. 
Jinda,  v.     FeUowship. 
Jindanla,  v.  Be  good  friends, 

with  Jlijindanlia  nli  Icadie. 
Jinga,  v.  t.     Cure  ;  heal  (any 

disease). 
Jinginla,   v.  i.      Enter  ;    go  ; 

come  in. 
Jinginlia,  v.  t.  Cause  to  enter. 
Jinla,  V.  i.     Dance. 
Jira,  V.  t.     Pour  out ;  set  a 

person  on  shore  ;  land. 
Jirinla,  v.  i.    Spill ;  be  poured 

out. 
Jiva,  V.  t.    Pick  (fruit)  ;  punch 

fruit  with  pole. 
Jivira,  v.  t.      Be  wilh'ng ;  re- 
ply ;  believe. 
Joha.     To  take  back  a  gift. 
Jogolia^Y.  t.  Disregard ;  slight ; 

mock. 
Jokxoa,   V.   i.      Rub   skin  off 

one's  self. 
Jokunla,  v.  t.     To  be  torn. 
Jola,  V.  t.    Make  thread  of  the 

fiber  of  pine-apple  leaf  by 

scraping. 
Jomha,  V.  t.     Marry. 
Jonihanla,  v.  i.     Marry  each 

other;  intermarry. 


MPONGWE  DICTIONARY. 


25 


Joma^  V.  I,  Be  or  become 
dry ;  wither. 

Joinanla,  v.     Quarrel. 

Jo7iga,  V.  t.     Join  ;  unite. 

JonginUa,  v.  t.     Remember. 

Jongunla,  v.  t.  Wish  for; 
long  ;  lust  for. 

Jonla,  V.  t.  Kill ;  cost ;  be 
worth. 

Jonlia,  V.  t.     Fill. 

JovXia,  V.  i.     Fill. 

Jo7'a,  V.  i.  Be  satisfied  with 
food;  filled. 

Joriza,  v.  t.  Satiate ;  fill ; 
satisfy  with  food. 

Jova,  Y.  t.  Bail  (canoe  or  boat). 

Jovunla,  V.  t.  Wash  a  thing, 
or  part  of  one's  person. 

Jdnga,  v.  t.  Drunk,  suck, 
smoke. 

Joioa,  V.  t.     Itch. 

Jufa,  V.  t.     Steal. 

Jugumia,  v.  i.  Brood  (on 
eggs). 

Jumhmila,  v.  t.  Hide  ;  con- 
ceal (a  thing). 

Junlo,  V.  t.  Be  bereaved ; 
left  desolate. 

Juwinlo,  rel.  conj.  But,  al- 
ways, contradicted. 

Jurunla,  v.  t.  Draw  water,  or 
rum  from  cask. 

Juwa  V.  i.     Die. 

Juwayuwa,  v.  i.     As  vessels. 

K. 

Kaga,  v.  i.  Sour;  spoil  (as 
food). 

Kadie,  1.  Man,  person,  any- 
body. 

Kagufna,  v.  i.  Stutter,  stam- 
mer. 

Kaka,  a.     Dry,  low  (tide). 


Kakisa,  v.  t.      Ward   off    (a 

blow). 
Kahwa,  v.  i.     Fall. 
Kakunlia^  v.  t.     To  cause  to 

fall. 
Kalua^  V.  i.     Change. 
Kalunlia^  v.  t.     Change. 
Kalanganlo^    v.   t.       To    tie 

{Ikalanganlo),  on  rafters  of 

house. 
Kamha,  v.  t.     Speak,  talk. 
Kainhinlct^   v.   t.      Speak   to, 

and  for  ;  pray  to. 
Kaminla,  v.  i.     Become  dry. 
Kanda^  a.     Sour. 
Kanjimla,  v,  t.  Strain  ;  skim  ; 

sift  out. 
Kanga,  v.  t.     Fry,  parch. 
Kanganla,  v.  i.     Walk  about ; 

frequent  a  place. 
Kanla,  v.  t.   Before,  advocate, 

defend,  favor. 
ICanla,  v.  t.     To  relate  {sin- 

kanlo) ;  legends. 
liao^  conj.     Except. 
Jfapa,  V.  t.     Threaten. 
Kccpa,  1.     (See  hoU  kapa).    A 

board. 
Kcipa,   1.      Cloth     worn    on 

shoulders. 
Kau7ila,   .  V.     t.      {kawunla). 

Change,  alter. 
Kavalia,  v.  t.     Roll. 
Kawa,  V.  i.     Fade. 
Ifd    (with  poro),     correl.    of 

vonde.     Much,  more. 
Ka^  aux.  v.     Can  ;  be  ;  sign  of 

pot.  mood. 
Kdga.     Launch   out,  or  into 

the  water ;  push. 
Kdgdra,  v.  i.     Snore. 
Kdgwa^  v.  i.     Go  out. 
Kdgunlia,  v.  t.     Bring ;  put ; 

cast  out ;  utter. 


26 


MFONOVV  E    J  >  ICTION AEY. 


Kdnda. 


,  V.  t.  \ 


KdMld,   V.     Def.    verb.     Be 

pleased  ;  please  ;  I  beg  you. 

PL      hdMloanli ;     kal'dld 

g'^om.pende,  gw'  AnyamVie. 
Kdla,  V.  i.     To  be  Bettled  just 

right. 
Kako,  V.  t.     Beget  or  bear  a 

child  in  one's  own  likeness. 
Kdlanla,  v.     To  resemble, 
Kdmha,  v.  t.     Parabolize. 
Kdmba^  v.  t.  and  i.     Scrape  ; 

walk  to  and  fro. 
Kdmbiza,  v.  t.     Follow,  chase, 

persecute. 
Kdminla,  v.  t.  Drive  (a  nail) ; 

ram. 

Kdndd,'  to  allow  ;  in 
the     phrase     Mnd'' 
Osaka  or  osyaka,  to 
f      buy  a  slave. 

Kdngdnde,  conj.     Because. 

Kdndenle,  conj.     Because. 

Kdnde,  conj.     Because. 

Kdnde,  1,  with  nli.  Contin- 
ual.    (See  Idioms). 

Kdnle,  conj.     If,  though. 

Kdngwa,  v.  i.  To  continue  to 
the  end.  Kdngwa  nV  ofn- 
anto. 

Kdnla.,  v.  i.     Cough. 

Kdnldkd,  v.  n.     To  the  end. 

Kdta.,  V.  t.  Question,  cate- 
chise. 

Kdte.^  1.     Question. 

Kavi,  1.     Back  of  the  head. 

Kdvia,  V.  t.  To  glory  over ; 
hector. 

Kdva.)  V.  t.  (hdwid).  Do  work 
handsomely. 

Kdzagdza,  v.  i.  To  make  noise 
against  the  side  of  a  house. 

Keha,  V.  i.  Be  ready  ;  con- 
tain ;  hold ;  suffice. 

Kekiza,  v.  t.  Make  ready  ; 
prepare. 


I  Kegwa.^  v.  i.     To  turn  round 
I      one's  self. 

I  Kegunlia,   v,  t.     Turn  (Luke 
I    ^vi.  29). 

Kela,  V.  i.  To  spoil  (as  old 
cassada  roots  by  turning  to 
wood). 

Kelima.,  v.  t.  To  act  contrary  ; 
disregard. 

Kemha,  v.  t.     Paint. 

Keniba,  v.     Ache. 

Kendekende.,  ad.    Quiet,  mild. 

Kenja,  v.  t.  Lay  up ;  col- 
lected tosrether :  to  arrange. 

Reiija,  V.  i.  To  be  near  set- 
ting (of  sun). 

/{era,  v.  t.     Divide,  distribute. 

Keriza.  To  give  others  chop  ; 
food,  etc. 

Keia,  V.  t.  Cool ;  cold  ;  be- 
come cold  ;  become  stiff  and 
painful. 

Keva,  V.  t.  Conquer,  sui-pass, 
excel. 

Ke,  ad.     Too,  also. 

Kegendia,  v.  t.     Tickle. 

Kegera,  v.  t.  Nibble,  gnaw, 
grate,  creak. 

Kela.,  V.  t.     Mince,  hash. 

Kelagela,  v.  t.  Examine, 
search. 

KUeJceU,  a.  Hanging  by  one 
end,  or  side. 

Kelina,  v.  t.  Cut  in  straight 
lines,  or  square  pieces. 

Kenda,  v.  i.     Go. 

Kendia,  v.  t.     To  lead. 

Kendiza,  v.  t.  To  cause  to 
go  ;  drive ;   impel. 

Kenliza.     Measure,  try. 

Kendele,  v.  t.     Decanter. 

Keg  era.,  n.  Insect  that  bores 
holes. 

Kmgele,  ad. 


MPONGWE  DICTIONARY. 


27' 


Kenlia,  v.  t.  To  exclaim 
"Ell !  "  at  a  person. 

Kenla^  v.  t.  liesist ;  advan- 
tages, 

Eera^  v.  t.     Circumcise. 

Kid^  ad.  Entirely  ;  clear  (used 
with  Mdgunla^  to  break). 

Kild  {akeuga).  Give  a  look 
of  contempt. 

Kila,  V.  t.  Anoint  head  of 
thing,  but  not  body  ;  smear ; 
daub  ;  iron  clothes ;  rub. 

Kincla,  V.  i.     Arrive. 

Kii'ua,  V.  i.  To  excel  all 
former  doing ;  condition  ; 
custom. 

Kiydrnha,  1.     Green  parrot. 

£koanga,  ad.  and  prep.  Be- 
fore ;  until ;  up  to. 

Koga,  V.  i.     Crow,  gape. 

Koginla,  v.  t.     Snutf. 

Kogova,  v.  t.  To  speak  a  for- 
eign language  imperfectly. 

Kola,  V.  t.     Buy,  sell. 

Komha,  V.  t.     Fence. 

Koinba,  v,  t.     Dodge. 

Eombinla,  v.  t.  Hera  ;  sur- 
round ;  flow  round,  as  a 
river. 

^  [In    the   phrase,  c  janja 

Mcindanll.    )      kandain  when  a  slave 

77-.      ,        .      •<      works  for  a  third  per- 

Ji.a7haani.     \      son    and    his    master 

(      takes  his  wages. 

Kongcu,   1 ;    pi.   ITconga.      A 

reed.     See  Ogonga. 
Kora,  V.  t.      Tie   up   into  a 

bundle. 
Korowa,  1.     A  crown. 
Kota,  V.  t.     Catch, 
Kotiza,  V.  t.     Understand. 
Kova,  V.  t.     Get. 
Kova,   V.       Use   illustration  ; 

make  a  supposition. 
Koza^  V.  t.     To  rub   against 

one. 


Kumanlia,  v.  t. 


Kiihu,  ad.     At  anchor. 
Kubunla,  v.  t.      Dip  up  (as 

water). 
Kuga,  V.  i.       Deprived  ;    or 

friends  bereaved  ;  dithcultj ; 

distress,  etc. 
Kulembenli,  1  {Nkulenibenli). 

Mangrove-seed. 
Ktimanla,  v.  i.     Stand  up. 
Kumha,  v.  i.     To  carry  a  load 

of  something. 
Kuminlia,  v.  t.  Collect ;  gath- 
er together. 
Kwnanla,    v.   i.       iiise    up ; 

stand  up, 

Straii^htcu  ;   lift 
up  one  fallen. 
Make      strai^'ht, 
(      e.g.,  a  road. 

Kumba,  v.  t.  Carry  on  back; 
shoulder. 

Kiiinba,  1.  Dam  (across  a 
water-course). 

Kumbisa,  v.  Keep  off  (nau- 
tical). 

Kunde,  1.  Remainder,  when 
part  has  been  paid  (in  trade). 

Kunda,  V.  t.  Add ;  increase  ; 
give  more. 

Kunda,  v.  t.     To  avenge. 

Kungula,  V.  i.  Growl ;  roar ; 
rumble  (as  tiger,  lion,  etc.); 
distant  -thunder. 

Kundinla,  v.  t.  Heap  up ; 
preserve. 

Kuria,  V,  t.  As  one's  racing- 
horse. 

Kutye,  1.     Paywe,  fetish. 

Kwa,  V.  i.     Fall. 

Kwa^  V.  i.     Faint. 

Kwa,  V.  t.  To  reap  ;  cut  plan- 
tations. 

Kwandaininla,  v.  i.     Pounce. 

Kwada,  v.  t.     To  snap  a  gun. 

Kwanga.  Event  up  to  a  given 
time  or  place. 


28 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY, 


Kwanle^  1  ( Uhwanle).  Wild 
lieu,  or  grouse. 

Kwenla,  v.  i.  Embark  ;  to  go 
iuto. 

Kwenla,  (inkdld).  Get  upon 
the  knees  ;  beg ;  implore. 

ICwe,  ad.  Little.  (Suffixed  to 
adjectives,  it  forms  compara- 
tives). 

KweJcwe,  ad.  Enough ;  prop- 
erly. 

Ifwera,  v.  t.  Cut  a  gash  in 
anything  ;  bleed. 

Kwh'Q,,  V.  t.     Rob;  plunder. 

Kw?za,  V.  t.  Cause  to  fall ; 
offend. 

Kioezanganla,  v.  i.     Agree. 

Kwer' adnngu.  To  cause  quar- 
reling. 

Kwera,  v.  i.  Wink  (with  the 
eyo).  • 

Kw3vifno,  ad.  Afterward ; 
soon ;  immediately. 

M. 

Mama,  v.  i.  Be  amazed ; 
wonder. 

Mande,  int.  pro.     Who.  ■ 

Mania,  v.  i.  Be  completed  ; 
finished. 

Mango,  1.  Swiftness;  run- 
ning (with  nli). 

Manja,  1.  The  relationship 
of  the  same  husband  of  the 
head  wife  to  the  other  wives. 

Manga,  1.     Manatus,  sea-cow. 

Manga,  1.  Treaty  made  by 
mixing  blood. 

Manji,  1.    .Maid. 

Maketa,  1.     Ginger. 

Mdga,  v.  t.  Slander ;  l)elittle  ; 
backbite. 

Mdga,  v.  i.{erungu).  Whisper. 


Mdgwa,  v.  i.  Break  (as  a  stick, 
pole,  etc.) 

Mdgunla,  v.  t.     Break. 

Mdngi  or  Mongi,  1.     People. 

Mdnld,  1.     Large  yam. 

Mdndi,  1.  Large  black  mon- 
key. 

Mdri,  num.  a.     One. 

Md/ri,  a.  pron.     Otlier. 

Mha,  1.     Corn  :  maize. 

Mhadi,  1.     Squirrel. 

Mhalo,  1.  A  relative  on  the 
mother's  side. 

MhaMe,  1.     Forehead;  skull. 

Mhojmbi,  1.     Gourd. 

M~bamha,  1.  Great  grand- 
child ;  niece ;  nephew  ;  child 
of  a  slave. 

Mhamta,  1.  Genealogy  ;  gen- 
eration. 

Mhanli,  num.  ad.     Two. 

Mbao.     Violence. 

3fhato,  1.  Miser ;  stingy  per- 
son of  money. 

Mhata,  1.     Stool. 

Mhanli,  1.  Day  after  to-mor- 
row. 

Mhawasya,  1.     A  wart. 

MhAgd,  i.     Fishing-ground. 

Mhdii,  1  {inbdvu).  Pus,  the 
collect  in  the  corner  of  the 
eye. 

Mhdnginli,  1,  hdnga.  Man- 
ner of  taking. 

Mhanginlo,  1,  hdnga.  Man- 
ner of  being  taken. 

Mhela,  1,  in  phrase  {jivelia 
Tcadie  mhela),  when  h  is  at, 
ad  is  tune. 

Mhe,  conj.  Or.  Mhe, — rnhe 
— whether — or. 

Mhe^  a.  Bad ;  ugly ;  disagree- 
able. 

M  heli.  War  expedition  ;  army. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


29 


Mhelehe,  1,  and  a.  Discord; 
quarrelsome. 

Mhenda^  1.  Ground  nut ;  pea- 
•nut. 

Mhei.     Piece ;  part. 

Mbenjo,  1.  Thwart  (of  boat 
or  canoe). 

31  heyile,  1 .    Spring ;  fountain. 

Mhezyo,  a.  Raw  ;  uncooked  ; 
green  ;  not  dry. 

Mhhni.     In  the  right. 

Mheli^  1.     Army  ;  host. 

Mhere,  1.     Herring  (fish). 

Mheve^  a.     Level ;  fiat. 

Mhia,  a.  Good ;  pretty ;  agree- 
able. 

MMamMe,  ad.  Well;  satis- 
factory. 

Ifhiago,  V.  i.     Belch. 

Mitnii^  1.     Satiety. 

Ml)iba^  1.     Palm-nut. 

Mblnde,  1.     Wild  goat. 

Mhinda.     Menses. 

Jfhinla,  1.     Louse. 

Mlnpa,  1.  Stripe  ;  welt  (from 
whipping). 

Mhinji,  1.    Wild  dog ;  jackal. 

Mhoa.     Dog. 

Mhogo,  1.    "Mouthfid. 

MhoJhO,  1.     Squirrel. 

Mhoni,  1,  mhonli.     Goat. 

Mhora^  1.     Place. 

Mholo,  a.  Old  ;  applied  only 
to  persons  and  animals. 

Mljolo^  pi.  mholoanli,  i.  v. 
The  word  of  salutation. 

3fhongwe,  1.     Yam. 

Mhongd^  1.     Bribe. 

Mhufna^  1.  Egg-plant;  to- 
mato. 

3fhuniba,  1.     Rainbow. 

Ifhungu,  1.     Toothache. 

Mhunlinli,  1 ;  hunla.  Abun- 
dance. 


Mhioegezi^  1.     Turtle. 
Mhundahi,  \.      Carelessness; 

wastefulness. 
Mhute,  1.     Bottle. 
Mhuve,  1.     A  tribe. 
Mhusya.     Fish-net. 
Mhwedi,  1.  Captive ;  prisoner. 
Menda^  1.     Hatchet. 
Menga^  1.     Pigeon./ 
Ifeza,  V.  t.    Dash  (water)  down 

or  upon. 
Mezwe.,  a.     Left-handed. 
Mengo^  1.     Horn. 

iTliat  same  ;  emphatic.  Suffixed  to 
pronouns,  self  to  adjective  lorms 
tlie  superlative  decree  ;  prefixed 
to  adjective-prououiis,  that  very 
same. 

Mega,  v.  i.  Doze ;  nod  ;  slum- 
lier. 

MeMlla,  v.  t.     Accede ;  agree. 

3£ende,  a.     Flexible  ;  elastic. 

MenU,  ad.     To-morrow. 

Mefna,  v.  t.  Confess ;  ac- 
knowledge. 

Mena,  v.  t.  Become  accus- 
tomed to  a  place  or  thing. 

llenliza,  v.  t.  Finish ;  com- 
plete ;  end. 

Meng''  auldngd,  1.  Wild 
pigeon. 

Menla,  v.  t.     Swallow. 

Mengele,  1.  W  ater  -  snail ; 
screw: 

Mepa,  V.  i.  Be  or  become 
good  ;  pretty  ;  pleasing. 

Mepia,  v.  t.  '  Make  good ; 
pretty  ;  sanctify. 

Mepanla,  v.  i.  Be  good  for 
each  other  ;  fit ;  suit. 

3fevdnld,  ad.     There. 

Mi,  pers.  pron.,  1  st  sin.  2£ie,  I. 

Mia,  V.  t.     Know. 

Mia,  a.  What  number;  how 
many. 

Mieza,  pro.    To  make  known. 


30 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


3£ienU,  1.  Manner  of  know- 
ing ;  knowledge. 

Minla,  v.  t.     To  not  answer. 

Mo,  a.     One ;  the  same. 

Monda,  1.  Amulet;  charm; 
fetish. 

Mondd,  1.  Plan  for  doing 
anything. 

Mondo,  1.     Snare  ;  trap. 

Mdnya  if  atanga.  Sweet- 
potato. 

Mpago,  1.  Tribute;  custom; 
duties  on  goods. 

Mpaga,  1.     Boubt,  with  dova. 

Mpandinlo,!.   Ladder;  stairs. 

Mpanlo,  1.     Adze. 

Mpanli,  1.'  Fashion  ;  custom  ; 

.     action ;  deed. 

Mpanga,  1.     Spur. 

Mpanga,  1.     Yoke. 

Mpanginli,  1.  Manner  of 
doing;  character;  nature. 

Mpava,  1.  Whip;  stick  for 
whipping. 

Mpdndd,  1.     Hoof. 

Mpdngd,  1.     Joint. 

Mpdngd,  1.  Thing ;  matter  ; 
aifair ;  difficulty. 

Mpdnld,  1.  Road  ;  path  ;  way. 

Mpdwgdy  y'  saon.  Something 
being  spoken. 

Mpdga,  1.     Lock. 

Mpd,  mpd  TWO,  ad.     Together. 

Mpe,  a.     Short. 

Mpemha,  L  Chalk,  flour, 
bread. 

Mpenju,  1.     Cockroach. 

Mpenli.     A  gift. 

Mpendinli,  1.  Size,  greatness. 

Mpc'zyu,  1.  A  burnt  place ; 
house  ;  farm,  etc. 

MxMd.,  1.     Blemish. 

Mpesyinla.  Manner  of  weigh- 
ins:. 


Mpira,  1.  The  second  plan- 
tain of  a  field.  The  first  is 
Okengo. 

Mpira,  1.  Gunpowder,  shoot, 
pot-black.  * 

Mpira  yi  tendinla.     Ink. 

Mpiri^  Y.     Darkness. 

Ifpio,  1.     Hotness,  heat. 

Mpivinla,  1.     Thought. 

Mpo,  adv.  Afloat ;  moving  on 
the  ground  in  water. 

Mpoge,  a.     Deaf. 

Alpogo,  1.     Mouse, 

Mpolo^  a.     Large. 

Mponja^  a.  Solid  ;  not  hollow. 

Mponde^  1.  The  wild  fig-tree 
of  several  species. 

Mpongwe,  1.  Wisdom,  pre- 
cocity. 

Mpongtoe^l.  Tribe  of  people, 
and  language. 

Mpoma^  1.     A  head-tide. 

Mpovo,  1.     A  fish-spear. 

2£punji,  1.  Tusk  of  ivory 
weighing  above  twenty 
pounds ;  ivory. 

Mpundu,  1.  Billet  of  wood 
(as  ebony,  red-wood,  fire- 
wood). 

Ifpungu,  1.     Palaver. 

Ilpusyu,  a.  {pmjnizyu).  Wide. 

Muzunla,  v.  t.  Crumble ; 
shell  off  (as  corn). 

Mwera,  v.  t.     Scratch. 

Mwetinla,  v.  t.  Motion  to ; 
wink  at ;  nudge  ;  jog. 

N. 

Nago,  1.     House. 

Nla%  number,  ad.     Pom'. 

Naka^  v.  t.  Care ;  want ;  care 
for. 

NaiTiha,  v.  t.  Cook  (by  boil- 
ing). 


MPONGWE   DICTIONAKY. 


31 


Nanla,  v.  i.     Lie  down. 

Nanl  ^antydvinld,  v.  t.    Sleep, 

Nanda^  1.     Mile. 

J^anlo,  1.     Spittle,  drive. 

N<^ga,  1.     Dirt,  dirty. 

Nanga^  1.  Dry  s-easou  of  Jan- 
nary  and  February. 

Naga^  v.  i.     Rain. 

Nagiza^  v.  t.     Cause  to  rain. 

JSFdganla,  v.  i.     Pass  by. 

N^dnld,  ad.     So. 

Wdntye,  1.  Eoom  (in  a  house). 

Ndzya^  v.  t.     Pass,  hand. 

Ndzinla^  r.  t.     Pass,  baud  to. 

Ndngioa^  v.  i.     To  arise. 

JSfdngunlia.    To  cause  to  aiise. 

Ndd^  a.     Lon^,  tall. 

Ndago.  A  fragrant  medicinal 
plant. 

Ndaga,  1.     Thing. 

Ndaginla,  1.     Desire. 

Mdatizo,  1.  Seam  in  a  gar- 
ment. 

Ndako^  1.  Brother  ;  ^cousin ; 
relative  too  near  to  marry. 

Wdavinli,  1.  Length,  distance. 

jNdd,  compound  ex. ;  nli,  d, 
prep,  and  pron.  by  the,  after 
pass.  verb. 

JVdego,  1.     Friend. 

JVdare.  Hold  here  ;  hand  here. 

JV^de,  compound  ex.  nle  ye  or  e 
prep,  and  pron.,  by  him,  after 
pass.  verb. 

jydele,  n.     Soft,  weak. 

JV^dege,  1.  Division  ;  knot  or 
joint  of  plantains,  etc. 

Ndelce^  1.  Deck  of  ship  ;  story 
of  house  ;  floor  of  planks. 

JSfdigo,  1.    Date  tree  and  fruit. 

Wdo^  conj.     But. 

Ndoanlinli^  1.  Being,  exist- 
ence, living. 

Ndova,  1.     Enemy  {mbe). 


Ndolo^  1.     Scar. 
Ndoiidai,  a.     High. 
Ndondo,  1.     Albino. 
Ndaa,    1.     The   month  atter 

child-birth. 
Wdumhaga,  1.     Sudden  fear; 

fri.ght. 
Negira,  v.  t.     Beg. 
JVega,  v.  i.     To  haste. 
Negcunega^  ad.  Soon  ;  quickly ; 

in  a  hurry. 
Wegiza,  V.  t.     Hasten. 
JVeiTia^  V.  t.     Weed;  cut   off 

or  up  by  roots,  weeds,  gifass, 

etc. 
Nhnba^  v.  t.      Coax  ;    entice  ; 

allure ;    wheedle ;'   flatter  in 

order  to  obtain  a  favor. 
Nemenlia^   v.   i.      Limp ;   be 

lame  ;  make  lame. 
Nengenha,  v.  t.     Show ;  point 

out. 
N'enga,  v.  t.     Learn. 
Nenja^  v.  t.     Teach. 
Nenge^  1.     Island. 
Nera^  v.  t.     Lick. 
Ngalca^   1.     Ant-nest ;    mush- 
room-shaped ;  earth-made. 
yandi.     Envy,  covetousness. 
N'ganli,   a.      Another's;    not 

one's  own. 
yando,   1.     An   assembly   of 

people. 
ydmbi,    1.     Harp    of    many 

strings. 
JSfgd,  int.     Lideed  ?  ah  ! 
NgdXa,  1.     Whirlpool. 
Ngdldngdld,   ad.  with  ponla. 

Intently. 
Ngdwe^  1.     Captain  (of  a  ves- 
sel). 
Ngdwd.    Hook. 
Jygdnle,  1.   Hoarseness,  husM- 

ness. 


32 


MPONGWE   DICTIONAET. 


Ngdi^  1 .     A  piece  of  cloth  for 
wearing. 

Nijdi-hoto^  1.     Coat. 

Ngai-y'okanda,  1.     Pants. 

Ngai  sydtu,  1.     Shirt. 

Ngdndd,  1.     Gourd. 

Wgdri,  1.     ]S"ape  of  the  neck. 

Ngdve-dosyi,  1.     Snnff-box. 

Ngeva,  a.     Bow-legged. 

J^go^  1.     Mamma. 

JVgosi/u,  a.     Obstinate  ;  cruel, 
(opposite  of  ilcesyi). 

Ngozyo,  1.     Parrot. 

Ngoa,  1.     Hog. 

Ngunge^  1.     Owl. 

Nguva^  1.     Porpoise. 

Ngiiwa,  1.     Siiield. 

Ngidv^   1.     Strength,   power, 
ability. 

Nguwu,  1.     Hippopotamus. 

Ngioa^  a.      Shut  ;  not  open  ; 
closed. 

Ngwangndndd^  1.     Trumpet- 
bird. 

Ngwasyi,    ad.      Fast   (in  the 
hand). 

Ngwanydrdi^  1.     Eagle. 

NgioWgdi,  1.     Wife's  mother. 

iV^t«^,  1.     Mother. 

Ngwesyindja^    1.       Sensitive- 
plant. 

Ngwentyontyo,  1.     Hop,  hop- 
ping. 

Niga,  V,  t.     Abuse,  curse. 

Nige-nlwndi.   Repent,  regret. 

Nimba,  v.  t.     Hide ;  conceal ; 
*  keep  secret. 

NiiUa^   V.   t.      Extinguish  (a 
candle). 

Niminla^  v.  t.  Refuse  to  give. 

Niffiianla^  v.  t.,  rel.  conj.  of 
nifhinla. 

^imhanla,  v.  i.     Be  hid. 

Nmitty  v.  i.     Dive,  sink. 


Nindia,  v.  i.     To  start ;  jump 
with  fright. 

Ningo,  1.     Rain. 

Niti,  a.     Strong;  fiery  J^like 
pepper)  ;  proof  rum,  etc. 

Niva,  V.  t.     Own. 

jSfjalie,  1.     First-born. 

Njalie,  1.      Post   supporting 
the  ridge-pole  in  a  house. 

Njali,  1.     Gun. 

Njali-tova.      Thunder. 

Njanla^  1.     Hunger. 

Njanlo,  1.     Birth. 

NjasyinXi^  1.     Weariness. 

jSfjave.     Leaf  of  a  tree. 

Njaiue,  1.     Fruit  (wild,  whose 
seed  yield  oil  for  food). 

N^jd^dnli,  1.     Fowl,  chicken. 

J^jdgu,  1.     Elephant. 

Njdla,  1.     Fiddle-string. 

Njdlihe,  1.     A  kind  of  snake 
which  lives  in  salt  water. 

N^jdmhwe,  a.    Bright,  shining. 

Njega,  1.     Leopard. 

Njeka^  1.     A  covenant. 

Njenge,  1.     Ant. 

Njenlo^  1.     View,  prospect. 

Njembe,  1.     Female  secret  so- 
ciety. 

Njegelu,  1.     Chin  ;  lower-jaw. 

JVjeve,  1.     Ripe  plantain. 

Njelcnjele,   a.     Glistering,  as 
sun. 

Wjele,  1.     Knife-blade. 

Njiko^  1.       A   khid   of  bird 
which  lives  in  rivers. 

Njinla,  1.     A  monster  monk- 
ey, larger  than  a  man. 

Njiwo.    A  kind  of  musk-deer. 

Wjuhe,  1.    Trouble ;  vexation. 

I^juwlnli^l^ex.juwa.     Man- 
ner of  dying ;  death. 


Nlcaga^  1. 
jyjcambi,  1. 


Armadillo. 
A  deer. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONAKY. 


33 


NTtago,  1 .    A  kind  of  monkey. 
NJcamhinli,    1.       Manner   of 
speaking;  dialect;  language. 
Nkala^  1.     Town  ;  a  cotfin. 
Pain. 
Hundred. 
Scale  (of  lish). 
Sickness, 
(with  nil).     Pur- 


Nkazya^  1. 
jSfJmma.,  1. 
Nkazyo,  1. 
*Nhanli^  1. 
Nhanda^  1 

posely. 
Nlcango,  1. 

fume. 
Nhavala,  1 
Nhavi,  1. 
Nhamh'i^  1 


Fragrance  ;  per- 


Horse. 
Paddle ;  oar. 
(pi.  IJcamhi).     A 

—-kind  of  deer. 

NUO/Yilo^  1.     A  legend  ;  story. 

Nhagazga^  1.     Elbow. 

Nhagii.     Cane;  staff. 

NMnde,    1.       Perseverance ; 
continual  exercise. 

Nhdndd,  1.    Company  of  per- 
sons traveling. 

NMngchild,  1.     Millipede. 

Nhdngdnld^  1,     Wind-pipe. 

Nhdnjd^  1.     Bat. 

Nhdnje^  1.     Shark. 

Nkdla^  1.     A  kind  of  shell. 

UMla,  1.     Clock  ;  watch. 

JSfJculd,  1.     Petition  ;  desire  ; 
prayer. 

Nhdmbd,  1 .  •   A  spiked   pani- 
cle, like  wheat. 

]}^kd)ni,  1.     Seaward  ;   south- 
ward. 

J^kdnge,  1.     Concubine  ;   an- 
other's wife  kept. 

jV^ke:Jd,     1.       Wise  ;    sober ; 
thoughtful ;  wide  awake. 

JVkei,  a.     Cold  ;  damp. 

JVkele,  1.  Barren  female ;  land. 

Nhegioinli^  1,  Qy..hgwa.  Turn- 
ing :  manner  of  turninff. 

Jykeva,  1.     Gum  ;  copal. 


Nkenjo.,  1.     Gizzard. 

Nkels  1.     A  skull. 

Nkegere,  1.  Any  creaking 
sound,  as  rudder,  etc. 

Nkende,,  1.  Fool ;  raca 
(Matt.  V.  22). 

NWcgenli^  1.     Spark  (of  fire). 

Nkhna,  1.     Monkey. 

N^keffia-yimpindd,  1.  Large, 
black  monkey. 

Nkema-yinddva.  Large,  yel- 
low monkey. 

Nkema-y''  osyoke,  1.  White- 
nosed  monkey. 

JVkemhd,  1.  A  suit  of  fine 
clothes. 

Nkhnbe^  1.    "A  cat-fish. 

Nkengd^  1.     Kindness. 

Nkenjo,  1.     Dwarf. 

Nkc'Te.  Nice ;  clean  ;  partic- 
ular ;  pure  ;  holy. 

Nkilinga,  1.  Yery  small 
monkey. 

Nkima^  1.  Boiled  plantains 
mashed. 

Nkizyi^  1.  Fragment ;  small 
piece  of  anything. 

Nkinda^  1.  Departed  spirit, 
i.g.^  Onyamhe  and  Ihanibo. 

Nkinji,  1.     Collection. 

Wkoga,  1.     Crown-bird. 

Nkogo^-\.  Supposition  ;  illus- 
tration ;  figure  of  speech ; 
proverb  ;  law. 

Nkolo,  1.  Evening;  P.M.; 
near  sun-set. 

Nkonla^  1.  Of  one  ageSj  a 
contemporary. 

JS^kdmhd  (pi.  Ikcwiba),  1.  A 
cross-street. 

JSfkofna,  1,  with  doanla.  To 
be  angry  with  one  anotl^er. 

jS'kombe,  1.  Sun  ;  calico  ; 
eloth. 


34 


MPONGWE    DICTIONARY. 


N komhenlongo,  L     Raven. 

Nhomhe-mjondo^  1.  IS'oou ; 
twelve  o'clock. 

Nhoiiibetenliafenlia.  Two- 
headed  snake. 

Nhonde^  1.     Head-wife. 

NJcogora,  1.     Wliip-snake. 

Nhondi^  1,  in  jDhrase  nlige 
nkondi  g^  osaun.  Repent 
of  a  thing. 

J^konga,  1.  Copper ;  chiefly, 
copper-rod. 

Nhongo^  1.     Cat-fish. 

Nkoro^  1.     Centipede. 

Nkova^  1.    Direction  ;  course. 

Novo,  1.     Scab  ;  an  eye-lid. 

Nkida,!.  Arotindmit;  knob. 

JSfkuvia,  1.     Shell. 

JSkumha,  1.     Dam. 

{A  dam  to  keep  off  wa- 
ter from  a  fish-hole 
while  a  woman  bales 
it  and  catches  the 
fish. 

Nkuiiiba,  1.  Company  (of 
persons) ;  a  party  of  persons. 

Nkunlu,  1.     Sea-turtle. 

Nkundu,  1.     Fetish-house. 

Nkuvu^- 1.  Large  mat  made 
of  flags. 

N kwdld,\.  Carelessness, waste- 
fulness. Plenty,  abundance 
of  food  {yasinya). 

Nkwere,  1.  Grating  of  teeth  ; 
ex.  nkwegere. 

Nla,  conj.   and  prep.      And, 

with,    by,    etc.,   used    with 

sab.  verb.  pas.  and  neg.,  viz  : 

%?^  docmla  azyele,  etc.,  and 

denotes  possession. 

Nle,  prep.  By  ;  used  with  the 
passive  voice  of  verbs. 

Nld,  conj.     Neither,  nor. 

Nlenld,  ad.     To-day. 

Nlengenlenge,  ad.     Midnight. 

Nli.)  prep.  With,  denoting  ac- 


companiment. Before  words 
beginning  with  r  and  w  it 
changes  to  nla. 

Nlofne,?i.  ipnlome).     Male. 

Noa,  V.  t.     Fight,  war. 

Noanla,  v.  t.    "Wear  (clothes). 

Noana,  v.  t.     To  owe. 

Hoga,  V.  t.     Build  (house). 

Noginla,  v.  t.  Net,  braid, 
plat. 

JSfoka,  V.  t.     Lie,  deceive. 

Nokinia,  v.  t.  Lie  to,  or  for, 
a  person  ;  deceive. 

Noma,  V.  t.     Bite,  sting. 

Nomha,  1.     Hill,  mountain. 

Nonga,  a.     First. 

Nonle,  a.     Bitter. 

Nonda,  1.  Flower  (general 
name). 

Nongo,  1.  A  very  thorny  tree, 
leaves  like  the  butternut. 

Ndngwa,  v.  i.     Arise,  awake. 

Ndngunlia,  v.  t.  Lift  up ; 
straighten  up. 

iV^/(»,  ad.     As. 

Ntanibi,  1.  Property  ;  riches ; 
goods  of  all  kind. 

N tango,  1.     Number. 

Ntavanga.     Early  raoi-ning. 

Niare^  i.  e.  nte  are.     As  it  is. 

Ntain,  1.     Witness. 

Ntaga.     The  same. 

Ntango,  1.    Number,  account. 

Ntdndi,  or  ntondi,  1.  A  lover 
{ntdndi  y^anUva). 

Ntdndinla,  or  ntondinla,  1. 
Will,  pleasure. 

Ntdsen,  1.  Thousand  (En- 
glish). 

Nte,  ad.     As,  like. 

Ntevo,  ad.  Empty,  only,  sole- 
ly, desolate. 

Nte  we,  1.  Rafter  made  of  a 
bamboo. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


35 


Ntinla,  1.  Butt-end ;  cause, 
reason,  purpose. 

Ntimhi^  1.     Plank,  board. 

Ntomha,  1.    Sand-bar,  shallow. 

Ntomho^  1.     ISTeedle. 

Ntomho  yi  hotinla^  1.     Pin. 

JSftogolo,  1.     Pepper  (red). 

Ntonda^  1.  Current  of  a  river, 
etc. 

JSftongo,  1.  Stick,  drum-stick, 
cane. 

Mori,  1.     Eat. 

Ntonlo,  1.  Breast ;  bosom  of 
pei'soii,  or  garment. 

Ntuenli,  1.     A  sharp  edge. 

Ntugu,  1.   .  Hip. 

Ntiilungu^  1.     Corner,  angle. 

JS'tuma,  1.  Fork  (for  eat- 
ing). 

J^tumhu,  1.     Heel. 

Ntumba,  1.  Contention,  light- 
ing. 

Ntuazange,  ad.  Perad venture. 

Ntunlu,  1.  Whole,  entire. 
Owenja  wantunUb,  whole 
day.  Phrase,  Anymnhie  a 
zye  nVovia  wantuntu  :  God 
is  no  respecter  of  persons. 

Ntyaga,  1.     Garden,  farm. 

Ntyamhi,  1.  Harp  of  live 
strings. 

Ntyanga,  1.     A  flag, 'ensign. 

Ntyango,  1.     Noavs. 

Ntyale,  1.     Custom,  fashion. 

Ntyago,  1.     Feast. 

Ntyande,  1.  Two  and  a  half 
fathoms,  cloth. 

Ntyavu,  1.     Soap. 

Ntyava,  1.     Vine,  hoop. 

Ntyangilia.  Rapidly  and 
loudly  spaaking. 

x^tyango.     Distance. 

Ntyanja,  1,     Rain  season. 

Myai,  1.     End. 


Ntyai  nli  ntinla.  From  the 
beginning  to  end. 

Ntya,  conj.  Either.  Ntya- 
ntyd.     Lithe*^  or, 

Ntyage,  1,  witli  hwa.  Quarrel, 
palaver. 

Ntya,  prep.     Between. 

Ntyamhd,  1.  A  loan  to  be  re- 
paid in  kind. 

Niydli,  1.     Small  bird. 

NtydngaJzanlo,  1.     Joint. 

Ntydnliy  1,     Shame. 

Ntyangim,  1.     Excuse. 

Ntydmhi,  1.     Plum. 

Ntydme,  1.     Hand. 

Ntydmhe,  1.     Marrow. 

Ntydria.  Secretly.  Prov.  i.  18. 

Ntyeri,  1.     Gazelle. 

Ntyendd,  &,.  Awry;  crooked; 
out  of  square. 

J^tye,  1.  Earth,  vi^orld,  coun- 
try, land. 

Ntyhnhd,  1.     Censure,  blame. 

JSftyenge,  1.  Wash-basin,  cup, 
bowl. 

JSftyenge,  1.     Sand. 

Ntyege,  1.    Short-tail  monkey. 

Ntyelele,  1.     White  ant. 

Ntyere,  1.     Ramrod. 

Ntyemhd,  1.    Blame,  rejaroach. 

Ntyigo,  1.     Chimpanzee. 

Ntyinla,  1.     Blood. 

Ntyinli,  1.     House-fly. 

Ntyuanli-])dti,  1.     Iron  pot. 

Ntyua-yogo,  1.    A  native  pot. 

Ntyolomho,  1.     Brass  kettle, 

Ntyolo,  1.     Hammei",  anvil.  • 

Ntyovi,  1.     Bamboo-nut. 

Ntyonda,  1.     Pudenda, 

Ntyondo,  1.     Heart. 

Ntyonde,  1.  Head  of  naviga- 
tion. 

Ntyongi.  The  lead  of  a  lead- 
line ;  a  Britannia  cup. 


36 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Ntyonjo^  1.     Leech. 

Ntyozyo^  1.     Foot. 

Ntyozyo-y'' -atanga.  Shoe,  boot. 

Ntyogo,  1.     Fetter. 

Ntyoro^  1.     Loop. 

Wtydnge,  1.     A  play  and  the 
board  for  the  game. 

Ntyanga^  1.     IS^ail  for  fasten- 
ing and  naihng. 

Ntybnga^  ovntydnga,  \.  Quar- 
ter, part  of  town. 

Ntyxigu^  1.     Day. 

Ntyuga^  1.     Jug. 

Ntyunla,  1.     A  deer-fly. 

Ntytiva^  1.     Open  sea. 

Ntyunlu,  1.     Driver-ant. 

Ntyxirnbu^  L     A  kind  of  tree. 

Ntyume.     Large  iish, 

N'uanla,  v.  t.     Owe. 

Wuga,  V.  t.     Kow,  paddle. 

Ntiginlia^  v.  t.     To  incite. 

Nximhu^  \ .   Bow  of  boat,  etc. ; 
boat ;  canoe. 

N^umbinli,  1.     Hatred. 

Numha,  V.  t.     Hate. 

Nunla^  V.  i.     To  smell. 

Nunliza^  v.  t.  Cans,  of  nunla. 

Nunja,  V.  t.     Shut. 

NuiiduvHe^   1 
herb  ;  mint. 

Nunga^  v.  t.    Light  (a  candle). 

Wungu^  a.     Old  (of  things). 

Nungunla^  v.  t.    Help,  open  (a 
door). 

Nungwch^  V.  t.     Be  opened. 

Nimgunla,  ex.  nungunla  ir. 
Help  each  other. 

JSfungwanla,    (as  keys).      To 
open  each  other. 

Nuwunla^     a.        Last  ;     ex. 
numounla. 

Nya^  a.  {pwcnja  nya).     Day, 
opening. 

JVya,  V.  t.     Eat. 


A   fragrant 


Nyalunla.  An  orphan  still  an 
infant,  and  nursed  by  an- 
other. 

Nyango^  a.     Small. 

Nyamhie,  a.    Yain,  useless 

Nyavali,  1.    Arm-pit. 

Nyare,  1.  Cow,  bull  (wild  or 
tame). 

Wyama,  1.     Wild  beast. 

Nyanga^  1.   Rust,  salt-water. 

Nyawe^2iA.  No.  NymoegeimA 
nyawedu.    "No,  cii-ee." 

Nyawhiyawe^  1.  Nothing,  no. 

Nyange^  1.    White  crane. 

Nyanto,  a.  (as  nyama).  Fe- 
male. 

Nyazyi,  1.  Sneezing.  (See 
jazya). 

Wydnda,  1.     Whale,  onion. 

Nydnla^  L.     New. 

Wydnli,  1.     Bird. 

Nydnyua,  v.  i.  To  be  straight ; 
to  be  stretched  out. 

Nydnyunla^w X.  To  stretch  out. 

Nyembi,  1.     Dancer,  singer. 

Nyenge^  a.    Many,  plenty. 

Nyenlie,  1.     Brass  (metal). 

Nye  (same  as  nya),  v.  t.     Eat. 

Nyezya^  v.  t.     Feed,  jDardon. 

Nyena,  v.  t.  Gain,  profit  (by 
trade). 

Nyezya,  v.  t.  Rule ;  govern  ; 
lit.,  cause  to  eat. 

Nyenya^  v.  t.  Sprinkle,  scat- 
ter, sow. 

Nyenga,  v.  i.  Tremble,  quiver. 

Nyenle,  a.     Another. 

Nyeivdj^  a.     Some. 

NyilOy  1.     Anchor. 

Nyilinlo,  1.     Dream. 

Nyinya^  v.    Urinate. 

Nyowe,  1.    Honey-bee. 

Nyongo,  1.  Steward  (bond  or 
free). 


Ot'"''  0 


'f 


MPONGWE   DICTIONAKT. 


37 


Nyomjiia,  v.   Be  straight. 
Nydnyunlia,  v.  t.  Straighten. 
Nyovo,  1.     An  instrument  to 

bail  a  canoe. 
Nyuma ,  I .  Back  (of  the  body) . 
Nyonge  {nydnge)^  1.     Thready 
Nynngd  {nydngd),  1.     Time ; 

as,  1  saw  him  three  times. 
Nydngdle,  1.     Noise,  racket. 
Nybnla  (or  nydnla),  1.    Ant. 


O. 


also 


0,   pers.   pron.     Thou, 
rel.  pron.,  who. 

wag:eB. 

OS^a^  4  (odika).     Nut-tree. 

Ohaki,  4.  Bamboo-pith  basket. 

Ohalmgd,  4.    Harlot. 

Oherinla.     Accuser. 

Oheli.  Sickly  person ;  sickness. 

Oho,  Y.     Iron  bar. 

Oboiohoio,  5.     A  coward. 

Ohota,  4.  Female  that  has 
produced. 

Ohu^  4.     Streak,  stripe. 

Ohulungu,  4.     Cavern. 

Ohumhulu,  4c.  An  open  court 
with  houses  on  three  sides. 

Ohwe  {obue),  4.  Light,  open, 
unobstructed. 

Odando^  4  and  a.  Pride,  proud 
man  ;  proud. 

Odd,  4.     Silence. 

Odede,  4.     Yalley. 

Omdembe,  4.     Calm. 

OdiTca,  4.  A  kind  of  condi- 
ment prepared  from  a  nut. 

Odo,  6.     Bed. 

Odokebole,  4.  Striker ;  vicious 
pei'son. 

Ododo^  4.  Scale,  balances,  steel- 
yards. 


Odolongo  (used  with  go).  On 
the  under-side  ;  under. 

Odovalova.,  4.  Enemy,  cen- 
surer. 

Odominlia,  4.  Beginner  (of 
a  thing). 

Odufna.,  4.    Cannon. 

Oduma,  4.     Snake. 

Odusyd,  4.     Ignorant  person. 

Oduere^  4.     Contentment. 

Of  a,  4.     Fish-bone. 

Ofalifa,  4.  Thorny  plant ; 
thistle. 

Ofafa^  a.     Brittle. 

Ofe,  4.     Thief. 

OfeUiza.     Deteriorator. 

Ofuru.,  4.  A  small  fly  ;  sand- 
fly ;  gnat. 

Oga,  5.  King ;  head  man  of  a 
town.  ^- 

Ogakisi,  4,  hahiza.    Defender. 

(jgdlanga7ilo,  7.  Ite  tied  on 
the  rafters  to  support  the 
thatch. 

Ogamhwe,  6.  Orator ;  spokes- 
man. 

Ogamhagambo,  n.  Palaver ; 
dispute ;  noise. 

Ogo.nganlo,  4.  Companion ; 
neighbor. 

Oganji^  4.     Yein  ;  tendon. 

Ogande,  7..  A  wash  or  bathing- 
place. 

Ogandaga,  4.  Health ;  healthy 
person. 

Oganla,  7.     Statue ;  jdol. 

UQanda,  5.    Doctor ;  conjuror 
prophet. 

Oganjo,  4.  Switch  end  of  an 
elephant's  tail. 

Ogara^  a.  Condemned ;  cast 
(in  a  trial). 

Ogaza.  Juice  of  ripe  plan- 
tains. 


S^/ 


38 


MPONGWE    DICTIONARY. 


Ogazagaza.     Strong,    healthy 

person. 
Ogasyo^  4.  Greediness ;  greedy 

(of  meat  or  money). 
Ogavalia,  4.     Ravine. 
OgA,  6.     Arm. 
Ogd,  6.     Handle  (of  jng). 
Ogd')nba,7.     Path  beyond  but 

near  a  town. 
Ogdli,  4.     Eope ;  cord  ;  vine. 
Ogdi,    5.         Mother,    father, 

brother,  or  sister-in-law. 
Ogdndd.     A  row ;  quarrel. 
Ogdndisi,  Kdnda.    Mild  word 

for  slave. 
OgrlngPj  7.     Eyelash. 
Ogdnld,  4.  An  elephant-trnnk. 

{Onldnld). 
Ogdgwo  {Kdgiixi).     A    going 

out. 
Ogemhia.  Pain.  (See  Kemba). 
Oge  ;  pi.  8ihe^  1.     A  fainting. 
Ogembd.      Handsome    article 

of  dress  or  furniture. 
Ogenge,  4.    A  pod  (of  pepper). 
Ogengende^  4.      Bad-disposi- 

tioned  person ;  foolish. 
Ogera^  5,  a.     Lazy. 
Ogela,  4.     Crack ;  split. 
Ogele,?i,.    Stingy;  op.  Ogwande 

(of  food). 
Ogenda^  5.     Guest;  stranger. 
Ogengilia^  5.     Copper-colored 

man ;  white  man. 
Ogendd,  7.     Journey. 
Ogendagendo.       Journeying ; 

a  wanderer. 
Ogengenli^  4.     Star. 
Ogengd,  7.     Lower-jaw. 
Ogenle^  4.     Flea. 
Ogege^  4.     Plover. 
Ogiligili,    4.       Tinithf ulness ; 

justice. 
Ogo,  4,  ex.  Ogovo.    A  piece  or 


bolt  of  cloth,  usually  14  or 
18  yards. 

Ogola^  4.  Intestinal  worm. 
Ogu-ola. 

Ogoto,  6.     Leg. 

Ogolongozyo.  A  cross,  thus : 
X  ,  a  man^s  "mark." 

Ogolo  nja  {agolonja).  Astride. 

Ogomha^  7.     P^'ence. 

Ogorn^e,  4.     Crocodile. 

Ogonli,  7.     Fire  and  iirewood. 

Ogombinlo,  4.     Hem. 

Ogonga,  7.     Boil. 

Ogonlo,  4.  Calling ;  duty  ; 
employment. 

Ogove.  4.     Apangwe  knife. 

Ogowa,  4.    Boil ;  kind  of  tree. 

Ogoro,  4.  A  band ;  a  chord,  etc. 

Ogore,  6.  Equity  ;  upright- 
ness ;  upright. 

Ogozyi.  Shouting  (of  "  E  ") 
at  top  of  voice. 

Ogu^  4.     A  worm  ;  maggot. 

Ogu^  4.  Sense;  gumption; 
the  mind. 

Ogula,  4.     Tornado. 

Ogxila^  4.  Tree,  which  bears 
NJcula  nuts. 

Ogulu,  4.     !Roj)e  ;  cable. 

Oguina,  4.     Cassada. 

Ogunle,  4.     Eyebrow. 

Ogumguva,  6.     Blacksmith. 

OguMia,  4.     Mast. 

OgimibanyoJisa,  4.  A  tree  re- 
sembling a  hazel  tree. 

Ogumhu,  4.  Strap  for  holding 
anything  on  the  back ;  sus- 
pender. 

Ogwanla^  6.     Mouth. 

Ogwande^  6.  Generous  ;  lib- 
eral ;  op.  ogele. 

Ogwera,  6.     JSTight. 

Ogwera-nlengenlenge.  Mid- 
night. 


MPONGWE    DICTIONAET. 


39 


OgwUi,  6.     Moon. 
Ogtcere,  4.     Sole-fisli. 
Ogwirinla,  1.     Back-yard. 
Ojanli^  4.      Farewell  {tiginla 

ojanli). 
Ojo,    4.      A    native    candle ; 

torch. 
Okaii^a,  4.    A  tent  (house). 
Okanla.    Advocate,  defender. 
Ohamhi^   4.     A  speaker  in  a 

palaver ;  preacher. 

(Used  only  in  impera- 
tive second  per.  in 
Btarting  for  some 
place,  or  to  in- 
crease the  speed 
I  of  a  person,  .  hois 
I      doing  eometliing. 

Ohao^  4.  Boundary,  division- 
line. 

Okapo,  4.    Leanness. 

Ol-asonguwu,  4.    A  raw-hide. 

Okclclu,  4.  Weariness,  e.-  g., 
of  sea ;  of  one  kind  of 
food. 

Olmngdnde.  Because  (of  time 
long  past). 

OMndd,  4.     Cotton. 

OJcdngd,  4.     Spine. 

Ohdngdld,  4.    Keel  (of  boat). 

Oheva,  4.    Wave. 

Okeli,  4.  Skill,  cunning,  sa- 
gacity, discretion,  careful- 
ness, watchfulness,  guard ; 
gof  oheli,  be  on  your  guard 
against. 

OTcenja,  4.     Green  snake. 

Ohendehende,  4.  Quietness, 
humility,  quiet  person,  etc. 

OheU  (hakele),  5.  Man  or 
woman. 

Okelakela,  4.  Brightness  (as 
of  sun), 

Olrngele.     Being  up  at  night. 

Ohengo,  4.  The  first  planting, 
or  ear.  of  com,  of  a  field. 

OkengeJcenge,  5.     Carpenter. 


OMVingdi^  4.  To  iron  shirts, 
or  any  cJothes. 

OJcita,  6.  liesidence  far  from 
home ;   to  trade. 

Ohokotwe^  7.     Bed-bug. 

Okolongo,  4.  Daad  standing 
tree. 

Okondo,  4.     Heap,  pile. 

Okongolia,  4.  Something  re- 
sembling sugar-cane. 

Okoiribanddndd^  4.  The  cres- 
cent over  which  the  hair  is 
braided. 

Okorwe^  4.  Binding  (of  a  gar- 
ment). 

Okugi,  4.  A  person  bereaved 
of  all  friends. 

Okmoa^  4.    Body. 

Okukwe,  4.  A  person  dressed 
hideously  in  disguise. 

Okunie,  4.  The  tree  of  which 
canoe  boats  are  made. 

Okwara,  4.    Cutlass,  matchet. 

Okwara  vfiwdra.     Sword. 

Okioende,  4.     Tail. 

Okwenla,  4.  Inside  (of  boat, 
etc.) 

Olako.  A  place  of  temporary 
residence. 

Oldgd.     A  kind  of  devil. 

Olald,  4.     Pawpaw  tree. 

Olddinli,  4;  Spy.    (Gen.  xlii. 

Oldgdzyonge^  4.    Fire-fly. 

Oldvi^  4.    River. 

Olamho^  4.    India-rubber. 

Onlamhanli,  4.     Dozen. 

Olasa,  4.    Orange-tree. 

Olanda^  4.    Dutch  knife. 

Olandunli,  4 ;  ex.  dandunla. 
Kedemption-money. 

Olanga,  4,  a.  Calling,  or  shout- 
ing at  the  top  of  the  voice  ; 
elephant's  voice. 


40 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Olatanlo^  4.  Assembly,  audi- 
ence. 

Oldnga^  4.    Valley. 

Olemha,  4.    Herd,  flock. 

Onlmge,  4.  Aim  (with  a  gun). 

Olega,  4.    Biscuit. 

Olemhianlo,  4.  Race  ;  trial  of 
swiftness. 

OUve,  n.  Hankering  after 
food. 

Olendd,  4.  Abscess  (in  the 
groin). 

Olele.    Tender. 

OUngo,  4.    A  space  of  time. 

OUrio,  7  ;  ex.  diria.   Honor. 

Olomha.    Interior-ward. 

Olomho,  4.     A  brass  kettle. 

Olonda,  4.     Bead,  seed,  nut. 

Olonda^  4.    Flower. 

Olongo^  4.  ISTeptune ;  a  large, 
flat  brass  pan. 

Olonga^  4.  Ring,  armlet,  ank- 
let. 

Olosi,  4.  Lime-tree ;  citrus 
raedica. 

Oloso^  4.     A  sore. 

Olovalovi,  4.     Enemy. 

Oluhu^  4.     Honor,  reverence. 

Olunda.     Generously. 

Oluo,  4.  Witness ;  one  pres- 
ent. 

Onlumbxv^  4.     Lip  testimony. 

Om  edu.     Any  one. 

Oma,  pi.  anlaga.  Person,  pi. 
people  (man  or  woman). 

Omhago,  4.     Sawflsh, 

Ohaka^  4.  Bamboo ;  pith-bas- 
ket ;  its  capacity,  one  bushel. 

Onibdma,  4.     Boa-constrictor. 

Omhdga^  4.  Hoe,  pick-axe, 
mattock. 

07nbdga,  5  (awdga).  Strangei", 
foreigner,  alien. 

Ombdnla,  4.     Mud, 


OrnMgd,  4.  Temporary  en- 
campment for  fishing  and 
drying  fish. 

Omhenla^  4.  Hunter,  fisher- 
man. 

Omhenle,  4.     Goora-nut. 

Ombiagwarda,  4.     Hypocrite. 

Omhilo,  4.  A  strong  Eian  ; 
worker. 

Omhonlo,  4.     Snot. 

Omhu^  4.  Ashes  (used  only  in- 
sing.) 

Omhutowa.  Fog,  mist.  (Gen. 
ii.  6). 

Omhnouiu.   Dust. 

Oi7d)U7^awure.  Rily,  or  muddy 
(as  water). 

Omhwiri.  A  kind  of  bush, 
and  sea-devil. 

Omenlo^  4.    Finger. 

Ofnengo^  4.    A  single  plantain. 

Omepinlo^  ex.  mepianla. 
Favor. 

Omia,  4.    Fur,  wool. 

Omienle^  4.  Pure.  Mpongwe, 
ex.  mie  nle.     I  say. 

Omoro  w'  oro'§i,  4.     Earring. 

Omosyo.     Idleness. 

Ompango^  4.  A  vine,  or  braid- 
ed isyonlo,  for  putting 
around  a  tree  and  one's 
body  to  assist  in  climbing. 

Oinpanganlo,  4.     Promise. 

Ompaho.     Bamboo  thatch. 

Ompingci,  4.     Ball. 

Ompindi^  4.  Farm,  plantation. 

Omp)ogonli,  4.     Hole,  lair. 

Ompendi.  l^eg  from-  knee  to 
ankle. 

Ompege^  4.     Cheese. 

Ompomhanla,  4.     Doorway. 

Ompomho,  4.     Nose. 

Ompomo,  4.     Point  (of  land). 

Ompdi.     Large  fish. 


MPONGWE   DICnONAEY. 


41 


Ompa/nie.  Irony.  Rekadie 
•ar'  omp\  ironical. 

Om/pemhe,  4.     Dew. 

Ompenle,  4.  Poisonous  snake ; 
viper ;  cerastes. 

OmjMnle,  4.  Handle  (of  any- 
thing). 

Ompunga,  4.     Wind. 

Ompunga  wi  nkdmi.  Sea 
breeze. 

Ompunga  w"  olorriba.  East 
breeze. 

Ompunga  wi  holo.  Land 
breeze. 

Ompunla,  4.     Stench,  scent. 

Ompuzyu^  a.     Wide. 

Ompondo^  4.     Bachelor. 

OmpeU,  4.     Neck. 

Ompei  {pineid^  ompeyi).  The 
little  linger;  are nV omj)eyi, 
he  has  the  nose-bleed. 

Ompufha^  4.     Year. 

Ompwenla,  4:  ]  ex.  poa.  Low- 
ness  of  tide  at  new  and  full 
moon. 

Oinanda,  4.     Day. 

Oma/nga^  4.     Kidney. 

Omanga)Tianga,  4.     Testicle. 

Omdri,  5,  a  pron.  Other 
(article  to  be  supplied). 

Offianga.,  5  {atanga).  Cocoa- 
nut. 

Omondo^  4.     Limit,  end. 

Ona,  4.     Loins. 

Onldmhe,  5.  Black  man  ;  ne- 
gro.^ 

Onlerd,  5.     Grown  person. 

Onembd,  4.  Flattery.  (See 
nemba): 

One,  4.  A  remainder ;  some- 
thing more  ;  the  last  of  any 
number  {o7ie  wHgomi)',  the 
tenth. 

Ongonga,  4.     Throat. 


Onddngd,  4.     An  ulcer. 

Oywanjayit^nja,  4  {onia). 
Koof. 

^?^^^7^,  s.  and  p.  4.  Depemli nt  ; 
ward ;  disciple.  ..-a^ 

Ondanda,  4.     Colic. 

OnjePnjHe,  4.  Brightness, 
effulgence. 

Onlive,  4.  Slave  ;  mild  word 
for  slave. 

Onlemhe,  4.     Honey. 

Onldngd,  .5.  Kind,  {onldngd 
nde) ;  what  kind  ? 

Onleirie.,  4.     Tongue. 

Onayi,  4.  Poison  for  arrows, 
etc.     'Pangwe,  onei. 

Onlenji,  4.     Teacher. 

Onlaga,  4.  Help ;  servant ; 
mild  word  for  slave. 

Onlag  ''onlagie,  5.    Wise  man. 

Onligi.  Sweet;  sweetness  of 
taste ;  for  smell,  mhia. 

Onlamba,  4.     Cloth. 

Onldnld,  4.  An  elephant's 
trunk. 

Onlogisyi,  4.     Builder. 

Onlold,  4.     A  liar. 

Onlome,  5.     Man,  husband. 

Onldngd,  4.     Kind. 

Onlumbu,  4.  The  lip  ;  testi- 
mony ;  assertion ;  report, 
etc. ;  nipple. 

Onongd,  4.  Zeal ;  ardent  de- 
sire ;  propensity. 

Ontinti,  a.     Tepid. 

Onyamhe,  4.  A  disembodied 
spirit. 

Onyao,  4  {onyawo).  A  young- 
er child.  {Ntydria  aye 
onyao  wi'  ndinga,  is  young- 
er than  Ndinga). 

Onyale,  4.  Tree,  without 
owner,  proprietor ;  used 
with  toa,  e.  g.,  anto  w'  atuenP 


i2 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


onyale ;  akandq^  m^  atuenV 

onyale. 
Onyemhmiyemba,  5.     Enemy, 

witch-poison,  adulterated. 
Onyale,  4.     Alugu  ma''  sovio 

anlingo,  rum  is  adulterated ; 

alugu  ni'  atuerili  onyale,  be- 
cause of  putting  many  water 

in  it. 
Onyenge,  4.     Mist. 
Onyena. 
Omamha,  4 ;  pi.  imamnba.     A 

snake, 
Oijwanga,  4  {imia).     Iron. 
Oywanla  5.     Child. 
Oytvanto,   5 ;    pi.   anto.      (A 

woman  ?)  a  girl. 
Oywdngwe,  5.     A  brother. 
Oytoembd,  4.     Soup,  gravy. 
Oywei  4   {imieyi).      Breath; 

heat  of  sun. 
Oyvjangala^  5.  A  small  snake. 
OpaMlia,  4.     Beginner   (of  a 

talk). 
Opanga,  4.     Made,  make. 
Opepe,  4.     Plantain-set. 
Opodunla,    4.      To   break    a 

house. 
Opmnbolo,  4.  Tree  resembling 

a  chestnut  tree. 
Orala,   4.      A   frame   over  a 

place   for   drying  fish    and 

things. 
Orango,  4.     Oath. 
Oralo,  4.     Clay  floor. 
Oramba,  4.     Root. 
Ordi,  4.     Ground,  soil,  clay. 
Ordwo,  4;  ex.  tdwa.     Curse, 

abuse. 
Orega,  4.     Cask,  barrel. 
Orendisi,  4.  One  causing  ano- 
ther to  write  {iidinga). 
Orendi,  4.       One  writing,  a 

waiter  {ndinga). 


Orendd,  4.     Mark,  letter. 

Oreru,  4.  Deer-horn,  trumpet. 

Orevunlo,  4.  Reproof,  in- 
struction, coi'rection. 

Orefna  wi  mpyio.  Covetous- 
ness. 

Orema,  4.     Heart. 

Oreti,  4.  Right,  righteousness. 

Origo,  4.  An  heir  ;  inheritor, 
successor  to  king. 

Orogo,  4.     Rogue. 

Orondo,  4.  A  young,  unfold- 
ed leaf. 

Orbnge.     Depth. 

Orogosaniba,  4.  Morning- 
gown,  cloak. 

Orole,  4.     An  awl. 

0}'oi,  6.     Ear. 

Oronglnlo,  4.     Grave. 

Oronga,  only  in  sing.  Mush- 
room. 

Orongimlio,  4.     Resurrection. 

Orowa,  4     Heaven. 

Orove,  7.     Prairie. 

Ordmhd,  or  ordmM,  4.  Trump- 
et, bugle-horn,  etc. 

Orondd,  or  ordndd,  4.  Eaves- 
bearer,  ridge-pole. 

Oronga,  or  ordngd,  4.  Chan- 
nel, deep,  depths. 

Ordngd,  or  ordngd,  4.  Sprout, 
blade. 

Orugo,  4.     A  brace. 

Orunda,  4.     Tabooed  ;  sacred. 

Orue,  7.     Hair. 

Oruvisi.     A  false  accuser. 

Osaun,  4.     Thing,  affair. 

Osahampazyo,  4.  Grass-hop- 
per. 

Osenja,  1.  Saturated  with 
salt.  Ntyuanla  y'  atuenV 
osenja,  the  pot  of  food  is  too 
salt. 

Oae^fl'i:  4-     Lizard. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY, 


4:3 


Osege,     4.        Eiitrail,     bowel 

(mostly  pi.) 
Osasa,  4.    Brass  rod,  used  here 
_in_trade. 
Osi/aka,  5.     Slave;  the  price 

of  a  slave. 


Osyange,  4.     Pea,  bean. 
Osyehianli,  5.     Bushman. 
Osydliwiengele.        Blue 
ocean).. 

Perseverance. 
Interrupter, 


OsydUnla. 
Osydkdlia. 
noyance. 
Osyenibe,  4. 
Osyingi,  4. 


(of 


an- 


A  trench. 
A  wild  animal, 
size  of  a  cat ;  predatory. 

Ososyi,  4.     Whistlino;. 

Osyuka,  4.  A  dish  of  pound- 
ed plantains,  ground-nuts, 
etc. 

Otale,  4.  A  place,  rack,  or 
frame  to  keep  chests  on. 

Otanganli,  4.     Whiteman. 
'Vtdki,  4.~    Cock's  tairfeathm*. 

Ote,  1.     Bamboo  lath. 

Otemu,  4.  Stupid,  dull,  fool- 
ish person  ;  greenhorn, 

Othnhe,  4.  Pawn  (not  a  per- 
son). 

Otete^  ad.     Thin  (not  thick). 

Otika.  A  wife,  or  near  friend 
of  one  dead ;  widow,  heir, 
etc. 

Otiketike  /  pi.  iti.  Fool,  idiot, 
stupid. 

Otoanla.     Bearer. 

Otowdo,  4.  Basket  (made  of 
African  rattan). 

Otowgo,  4.     A  corn-stalk. 

Otdndd^  4.  Hair-pin  of  ivory, 
wood,  iron,  brass,  etc. 

Otdngu,  4.     Gun-barrel. 

Otu,  4.     Joke  (mostly  pi.) 

Otuniba,  4.     Belt,  girdle. 


Otutu,  4.     Smoke. 

Omhutova^  4.     Fog. 

Ovango.  Some  thing  (as 
poison). 

Ovamho,  1.  Bark  of  a  tree 
used  in  building  houses' . 

Ovamba,  4.     Freckle. 

Ovamie,  4.  Flame,  blaze  (of 
fire). 

Ovago.  An  exclamation  of 
surprise  ;  a  meeting  place. 

Ovangi,  4.     Maker. 

Ovdvi,  4.  Mediator ;  for  mes- 
senger, igend-e. 

Ovega,  1.     Shoulder. 

Ovela,  7.  A  concealed  pit  for 
catching  wild  animals. 

OveQuhi,  5  (hemba).     Spy. 

Ovengevhige,  4.     Smile. 

Oviro ;  pi.  oviruanli,  def.  v. 
Let  us  go  ;  come  on, 

Ovdvi,  a.     Lustful, 

Ovonlo,  6,  Skill,  cunning, 
artifice  (mostly  in  pi.) 

Odatnbo,  4.     Jib-sail. 

Ovanja,  7.  Side  (of  per- 
son). 

Odenda,  7  {w'^itena).  Scissors, 
shears. 

Ovenda,  7  {uHsenglnla).  Ra- 
zor. 

Ofnanda^  4.  L)ay,  in  opposi- 
tion to  night. 

Owaro,  6.     Canoe. 

Owatanga^  6.  Vessel ;  white 
man's  canoe. 

Owaro-tutii^  6.  Smoke-canoe ; 
steam-boat. 

Omanto,  5.  Woman,  wife ; 
pi.  rnito. 

Omanto-tigo.     A  widow. 

Omanio-tika.     A  widow. 

Ovanga,  7.     Daybreak. 

Owavi,  7.     Leaf ;  pi.  ijavi. 


u 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


OLodngd,  4.     Herb  (Geii.  ix. 

22) ;  a  growing  crop. 
Owenja,  6.     Daj^,  the  time  it 

is  light. 
Owenja-nya.      The  beginning 

of  day. 
Owenja-sya.      The    close    o± 

day. 
Owera,  Y  ;  pi.  fera.     Finger- 
nail, etc. 
Oweld,  4.     Paint. 
Ovjoiisi^  4.     Striker,  fighter. 
OwonliawonUa,  4.  The  crown 

of  the  head. 
Owonda^  4.     Limit,  border. 
OwonliawonUa^  7  ;  pi.  ihonlia- 

wonlia.     A  butterfly. 
Owowa,    7;     pi.,  ihowa.      A 

feather. 
Owdngd.,  4.     Plant,  seed. 
Oydgisyi  {jdga).   A  swimmer. 
Oyanli,  4.     Pruitful  person. 
Oyanj)^  4.       |  {janja).         A 
Oywnjisyi,  4.  j       worker. 
Oyemho,    7.       Ballad,     song, 

hymn. 

/I       .     .    ,    )  A   person    who 
Oyeqtsyi,  4.  f      ,  ^    ,  -, 

n       •   T   A    r      trnsts  a  cred- 
OyeginU,  4.  j      .^^^,^ 

Oyinlo,  4.     Dancing. 

Oyigo^  4:{j{ga).  Inheritance  ; 
property  left  to  be  inherited. 

Oyingo,  4.     Red-wood  tree. 

Oyila,  6  ;  pi.  amb.  Palm-nut 
tree. 

Oyilisi.     Destroyer. 

Oyonlisi,  4.  Hunter,  fisher- 
man. 

Oyombo,  4.     Polygamist. 

Oydngaydngo.     Beverage. 

Oyuwe^  7.     G-ray  hair. 

Ozaia,  4.  Nap  of  cotton  cloth ; 
in  pi.  fring3. 

Ozamha,  4.     Side,  part,  self. 


Ozanja,  4.     Eel,  bustle. 

Ozange,  4.     Light. 

Ozaviiilo,  4.  Blessing  ;  spec, 
that  conveyed  by  puiiibulia. 

Ozd7nhi,  4.     Parent,  ancestor. 

Ozyd,  or  ozyo,  4.  Pipe ; 
tobacco  pipe. 

Ozdzi,  4.     Pestle. 

Ozindi,  4.     Comforter. 

Ozira,  4.     The  side  of  a  house. 

Oziina,  4.  Gravity,  serious- 
ness ;  opposite  of  orogo. 

Ozowa,  4.     Venereal  disease. 

Ozindio,  4.  Comforter,  con- 
solation. 

Ozombio,  4  {zomhia).  Com- 
mandment. 

OzyahiUa,  7.  Kindler;  small 
tire- wood. 

Ozydngd,  4.     Arrow. 

Ozydgunla,  4.     JSTostril. 

Ozydzyd,  4.  Affair,  business, 
palaver. 

Ozymdo,  4.    Pay,  wages,  hire. 

Ozyenld^  4.  A  wooden  wedge. 

Ozyeve,  4.     Spoon. 

Ozyege,  4.     Beach. 

Ozyivo,  4.     Whipping. 

6^si/o,  4.     Face. 

Ozyonlo,  4.     Wooden  spear. 

Ozyonle,  4.     Flesh,  meat. 

Ozyonlo,  7.     African  rattan. 

Ozyoto,  4.  Funnel  made  of 
leaves. 

Ozydnga,  4.  Mouth  of  pig, 
dog,  etc. 

Ozymiginlo,  4.     Salvation. 

Ozuminlio,  4.     Praising. 

Ozyunge,  4.     Saviour. 

OzyuTnba,  4.     Beak  of  bird. 

Ozyungahanlo,  4.     Chain. 

Ozyume,  7.  A  name  of  woman. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


45 


P. 

Pa^  Y.  t.     Give. 

Pa^  ad.     Not. 

Pa.  Denoting  completed  ac- 
tion. 

Paga,  v.  i.  Be,  or  become 
rich ;  well  supplied. 

Pagia,  v.  t  ;  caus.  of  jpaga. 
Enrich. 

Pago^2i.     Coarse. 

Paginla,  v.  t.  Charge  (a  gun)  ; 
till  a  pipe. 

Pahilia,  v..  t.     Begin. 

Pakunla^  v.  t.  Peel  (with 
fingers). 

PaTcioa,  v.  i.  To  break  off,  or 
come  off  in  pieces. 

Pala,  V.  t.     Brush  off. 

Pamha,  v.  i.  To  have  diar- 
rhoea. 

Panla,  v.  t.  To  form  by  cut- 
ting. 

Panda,  v.  i.  Ascend,  climb, 
rise  (as  tide). 

Pandiza,  v.  t.  Caus.  oi panda. 

Pandia,  v.  i.  To  ascend  a 
river. 

Panganla,  v.  t.  Promise, 
pledge  (friendship). 

Panga,  v.  t.     Make,  create. 

Panginla,  v.  t.     Govern,  rule. 

Panla,  v.  t.  Hew,  dig  out  (a 
canoe) ;  sharpen  (a  pole). 

Para,  v.  t.  Embrace  (as 
friends  by  hugging). 

Para,  a.  Crowded  full ;  lum- 
bered up. 

Parapara.  Things  in  con- 
fusion. 

Para,  v.  t.  To  hang  on  the 
arm  or  shoulder. 

Paranla,  v.  i.     To   be   full ; 


crowded  ;    recip.    conj.    of 

para. 
Paria,  v.  t.     To  carry  in  the 

arms. 
Parunla,    v.   t.     Disentangle 

(as  a  net  that  is  fast). 
Pixsa.     To  scratch. 
Patalcapataha^      a.       Hough 

(Luke  iii.  5). 
Pava,   v.   t.     Disobey,   rebel, 

forsake, 
Pava,  V.  t.      To  dig   up  (as 

plantain  sets). 
Pazanganla,   v,   t.      Scatter, 

waste. 
Pazya,  v.  t.     Search  (by  turn- 
ing over  things). 
Paga,  v.  t.    Prophesy,  conjure. 
Pdgwa,  V.  i.     To   be,  or  be- 
come   soft,    ripe     (a    boil), 

also  banana. 
PdMsd,    V.   i.       Go,   or  pass 

through. 
Paid,  ad.     Well. 
Pdma,  V.  i.     Be  fat. 
Pdfniza,   v.,  caus.   of  pdma. 

Fatten. 
Pdndia,  v.  t.     Feign. 
Pdnla,  V.  t.     Be,  or  become 

cool.. 
Pdnliza,   and   Pdnlia,   caus. 

conj,  (A pdnla. 
Pdpdlia,  V.  t. 
Pegaga,  v.  i.     Be. 
Pehwavehwanla,    v.    i.       To 

pass  by  one  another  ;  going 

opposite  ways. 
Pels,  ad.     Soon,  immediately. 
Penda,  v.  i.     Be,  or  become 

great ;  grow. 
Pendia   and  Pendiza,   v.  t., 

caus.  conj,  o^ penda. 
Pengahanla,  v,  t.     Exchange, 

swap. 


46 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Penga,  1.  A  sister,  or  near 
relative  ^iven  in  exchange 
for  a  wife. 

Peng'esonge.     To  fast. 

P&nginla,  v.  t.     Wait  for. 

Ponga,  v.  t.  Commit  adul- 
tery or  fornication  by  a  man 
on  a  woman  ;  pass,  voice  for 
a  woman. 

Pe^ijavenja,  v.  t.     Keep. 

Pepia^  V.  t.  Beckon  to  (by 
weaving  the  hand). 

Pepa,  V.  t.     Fan  ;  use  a  fan. 

Pera^  v.  i.  Escape  ;  run  away  ; 
be  lost. 

Periza,  v.  i.  Cause  to  escape  ; 
run  aw^ay. 

Pera,  v.  i.  {anlingd).  Get,  or 
bring  water  from  the  spring. 

Peria^  v.  t.  Give  place;  stand 
aside ;  to  make ;  let ;  help 
one  to  pass. 

Perisa,  v.  t.     Lose. 

Pesya,  v.  t.     Weigh. 

Pesyanla.     To  contend  with. 

Pevinla,  v.  i.     Blow  (as  wind). 

Pezya,  v.  t.  Burn  ;  caus.  conj. 
oi_pia. 

Pe,  ad.     Still,  now,  yet. 

Pedia,  v.  t.    Insult,  disregard. 

Pekepche^  ad.  Continuously ; 
all  the  time. 

Pela,  V.  t.  Hunt  fish  wuth 
harpoon  (Manga,  etc.) 

Pelavela,  v.  t.     Brandish. 

Pehavel'a,  v.  t.  Flap  (as  a 
bird  in  flying). 

Penla,  v.  i.  Be  slighted ; 
omitted  in  distribution  of 
favors;  be  absent.  Kadie 
avenli  esango  ;  hadie  avenli 
evilo  jao ;  ndinga  epenV 
ezango  jao. 

Penliza,  v.  t.     Caus.  of  penla 


avenliz'  oijwanli'ain  ezango 
ga  nta  venli  ngoa  mengo. 

Peni,  1.     Span. 

Penlia.,  v.  t.     Accompany. 

Pengunla^  v.  t.     Castrate. 

Penjinla,  v.  t.,  e.  g.  fanga. 
Fear  and  fly  from. 

Penla,  v.  t.     Twist. 

Pera,  v.  t.  Imitate  by  instinct, 
or  example. 

Peva,  V.  i.     Stagger. 

Peva,  V.  i.  Float,  drift  with 
the  current. 

Peya,  v.  t.     Lift ;  push  up. 

Pla,  V.  i.     Burn. 

Piaganla,  v.  i.  Pass  by ;  ex- 
cel. 

Piangxinliib,  v.  i.  Chew,  masti- 
cate. 

Piara,  v.  t.  Squeeze  (with 
the  hand,  milk  a  cow). 

Piere,  ad.     Near. 

Pie,  ad.     Close  by. 

Piga,  V.  t.     Keep. 

Piginla,  v.  t.,  rel.  conj.  Kee^ 
for. 

Pika,  V.  t.  Boast,  bake,  heat 
(an  iron). 

Pikilia,  V.  t.     Think. 

Pila,  V.  i.     Be,  or  come  from. 

Pinda,  1.  Black  or  dark  cloth 
used  for  mourning. 

Pinda,  V,  i.     Lower  (as  sky). 

Pindia,  v.  t.     Push,  shove. 

Plndinla.     To  push  along. 

Pinga,  v.  t.  Roll  up  into  a 
roll  or  ball ;  wind  around. 

Pingwa,  v.  i.     Go  round. 

Pingioavingwa,  v.  i.  Sur- 
round. 

Pinja,  V.  t.     Choose,  prefer. 

Pinja.  To  push.  (Seepindia). 

Pinla,  V.  t.  Deliver ;  take 
to ;  rel.  conj.  oi  pa. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


4Y 


Pita,  V.  t.     Squeeze,  cheat. 
PitaJcanla,  v.  t.  Press  against, 

upon,  down. 
Piva,  V.  t.     Suck. 
Pivia,  V.  t.     Think,  consider. 
Piza,  V.  t.     Wring,  turn,  bore 

(with  anger).  • 

Pisanla,  v.  t.  Wind,  entwine. 
Pisa.     To  speak  a  hinguage. 
Poa,  V.  i.     Ebb  ;  dry  up  (as  a 

spring). 

Podunla,  v.  t.      Break  open 
(a  house). 

Poelela,  v.  i.     Slip,  slide. 

Poganlio.,  v.  t.     Listen. 

Poginla,  v.  t.  Pity ;  have 
mercy. 

Poka,  v.  i.     AVade. 

Poli^wa,  V.  i.  Be  dull,  blunt, 
notched. 

Polo,  ad.  Much,  very,  greatly. 

Poma.     Peel  bark. 

Po)na,  V.  i.     Grow. 

Pofniza,  V.  t.,  (vaus.  oi  poma. 

Porno  inV  ihahu).  To  stum- 
ble ;  hurt  by  stumbling. 

Poinba,  V.  i.  Wander  a 
fugitive. 

Pomhiavomhia,  v.  i.  Oscillate. 

Ponine.     Unoccupied  place. 

Pona,  V.  i.     See,  behold. 

Pondua.,  v.  i.     To  wax  worse. 

Ponia,  V.  t.  Point  at ;  aim 
at. 

Ponja^  V.  t.  Miss  (in  shooting). 

Poria,  V.  t.  Sharpen  (by 
whetting  or  grinding). 

Pongwe,  1.  Wisdom,  preco- 
city.    (See  Mjjongwe). 

Poro,  ad.  (see  Ted).  Follows 
vonde  as  correl.  Much, 
more. 

Posyo,  ad.     More. 

Poswa,  V.  i.     Fall. 


Posyunlia,  v.  t.,  caus.  To 
fall ;  to  fall  upon. 

Posyanlio,  v.  p.  To  be  fallen 
upon  by. 

Pova,  V.  i.    Flow  (as  a  liquid). 

Powl',  1.     Back  door. 

Powe,  3  and  5. 

Poza,  V.  i.  Stop ;  leave  pur- 
suit ;  endure  ;  be  patient ; 
e.  g.,  devanla,  to  forget ;  stop 
doing  a  customary  thing ; 
e.  g.,  loving,  giving ;  poz' 
omosya,  pass  awiiy  time. 

Puga,  V.  t.     Cover. 

Pugiza,  v.  t.  Silence,  inter- 
rupt, extenuate. 

Pugu,  ad.  In  a  pile  outdoors ; 
by  me,  at  hand. 

PiiJca,  1.     Bag,  sack,  pocket. 

Pulemango.     To  run. 

Pule.  ^  To  fade. 

Pundiga,  v.  To  conceive ; 
become  pregnant. 

Punda,  V.  i.  To  be  launched  ; 
afloat. 

Punga,  v.  t.  Throw,  cast  (a 
rock,  a  net). 

Pundia,  v.  t.     To  launch. 

Punga,  v.  t.  To  anchor  (as 
boat). 

Pumbe.  To  run  over  (as  yeast). 

Pumhxiliu,  V.  t.  Blow  spittle 
upon  ;  to  bless  ;  oganga  ep^ 
oma  igwarda,  that  he  may 
kill  the  sea-cow. 

Punu,  1.     Pawn. 

Punjinla,  v.  t.  Blow  (with 
mouth) ;  bud. 

Pura,  V.  t.  Fold  up  (as  clothes). 

Pura,  V.  t.  (with  mondoy. 
Lay  a  snare ;  set  a  trap. 

Purunla,  v.  t.  Roll  up  to- 
gether (into  ball  or  roll) ; 
stoop  down. 


48 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Puranla-Tribe,  y.  i.     To  bend 

down. 
Purua,  V.  i.     Be,  or  become 

untied. 
Parunla^  v.  t.  Untie,  unloose. 
Pusu,  1.     Silk  (of  corn). 
Pusi,  1,     Cat. 
Pupil,  a.     White. 
Pusd.     Accident. 
Puvinla,  v.  i.     To  be  jealous 

of. 
Piizwa.     To  burst  open  (as  a 

barrel). 

R. 

Ralie,  a.     Full. 

Ret.     Whole,  entire. 

Pdwonge.  A  kind  of  stars  in 
the  heavens  resembling  a 
lizard. 

Pereuenle,  1.     Master,  owner. 

Rekadie.  A  certain  person  ; 
a  person  ;  such  a  one. 

Rere,  1.  Father,  master,  pro- 
tector ;  vera  /  in  voc.  case. 

Regd,  a.     Crooked,  wrong. 

Rekope,  probably  adv.  phrase. 
Avenli  tnie  so,  rekope^  i.  e., 
he  gave  it,  but  soon  de- 
manded it  back  again. 

RUi,  ad.     Rightly,  truly. 

Rue,  a.     Bent,  crooked. 

S. 

Sa.  A  terra  to  frighten  or 
drive  away,  or  out,  any  ani- 
mal. 

Saga,  v.  t.  To  rub  oil  on 
one's  self. 

Bagia,  v.  t.  To  rub  oil  on  an- 
other person. 

Salinla,  v.  t.  Combing  (i.  e., 
JEsalinla,  comb). 


Salia,  V.     i.       Be    detected; 

found  out. 
Sanli.       What?  how?  why? 

olingo   sanll,   how    long   a 

time  ? 
Sanibo,  conj.     Therefore,  so. 
Scmgasanga,  a.     Tliin,  sleazy. 
Sangunla,   v.  t.     Salute,  em- 
brace.    (See  syangunla). 
Sambakanla,  v.  i.    Be  restless ; 

sleepless ;  roll ;  toss  to  and  - 

fro. 
Samha,  v.  t.     To   spread    (as 

setting  a  table). 
Sapitnina,  1.     Bolt. 
Sapilia,  v.  t.     Confuse,  per- 
plex. 
Sasunla,  v.  t.     Unravel ;  take 

to  pieces. 
Sava,  V.  t.     Curse. 
Sad  la,  V.      Owenja  wl  savia. 

It  lightens. 
Savinla,    v.    t.       Reverence, 

worship,  bless. 
Sawunla,  v.     Prey ;  raven. 
Sazunla,  v.  t.     Tear  in  pieces ; 

devour    greedily    (tiger,    a 

goat). 
Sazya,    v.  t.      Take    or  tear 

down   (a  house);    efface    a 

writing. 
Saga,   v.  i.      Do  wrong;   go 

crooked. 
Sdgiza,  v.  t.     Befool. 
Sdgunla,  v.  t.     Trim,  ojo,  etc. 
Sdldwdld.     Silver. 
Sdlinla,  v.  i.      To  persevere 

in.  • 

Sdrriba,  v.  t.     Kiss. 
Sdmhanla  v.  t,  ;  recip.  con.  of 

sdmha.     Kiss  each  other. 
Sdlna.      To   string  beads,  or 

anything. 
Sdnga,  v.  t.     Mend,  repair. 


MPONGWE    DICTIONAET, 


49 


Saga,  v.  t.  {ihonli).  To  cut 
or  hew  firewood. 

Sdta,  V.  t  Creep  up  to  slyly ; 
surprise. 

/Sdva,  V.  t.     Smite,  cut, 

Sdva,  V.  i.     Be  sorry. 

Sdzye^  1.     Soldier. 

Sdzya,  v.  t.  Seduce ;  lead  to 
sin. 

Sdzya,  v.  t.  Complain ;  talk 
a  palaver. 

Sdzyinla,  v.  t.  To  complain  to. 

Sizisya,  V.  t.  Sue  (at  law) ; 
talk  a  palaver. 

Sega,  v.  t.     Mock. 

Senja,  v.  t.  Disown  an  agent's 
act. 

Sezya,  v.  i.  Lay  the  head 
down. 

Se,  ad.     How,  why. 

Se,  int.  pron.     What. 

Sei,  ad.     Out,  protruding. 

Sehe,  1  {isehe).     Dirt. 

f  Prompt        to 

Sekelia,  v.    t.  J     evil,  or  con- 

Sekedia,  v.  t.  j     tinuance    in 
[     evil. 

SekuMa,  v.  i.     Sob,  sigh. 

Sela,  V.  t.  (with  isdngd).  To 
be  in  travail. 

SeUla,  V.  i.     Slip. 

Sella.     Laugh  at. 

Semha,  v.  t.     Scold,  blame. 

Sema,  v.  t.-    To  agree  to. 

Senlia,  v.  i.  Start  (on  a  jour- 
ney). 

Sevia,  V.  t.  e.  g.,  nlungunla, 
to  help;  e.  g.^javuria,  toss 
up  and  down  ;  e.  g.,  rice  in 
a  fan. 

Syagia,  v.  t.     Anoint,  smear. 

Syaioga^  v.  t.     Peel. 

Syacuga,  v.  t.  Wrap  (a  gar- 
ment round  one's  self). 


Syaiya,  v.  t.  {say a).  Be  dis- 
appointed ;  ashamed. 

Syazya,  or  Sazya,  v.  t.  De- 
molish, tear  down  (a  house)  ; 
efiaee. 

Syardncla,  v.  i.  Love  one's 
self  ;  ref.  conj.  of  tdnda. 

Syavanlia,  v.  i.  Hang  one's 
self  ;  ex.  hanlia,  ref.  conj. 

Syape,  1.  Key,  mostly  used 
in  pi.,  even  when  one  is 
meant. 

Syambua,  v.  i.  Open  (as  a 
flower) ;  bloom. 

Syarnba,  v.  t.  Set,  arrange  (a 
table) ;  spread  out ;  to  hang 
up  a  thing. 

Syanibunlia  ilambunla).  To 
spread  out  Hat. 

Syayuwa,  v.  i.  Commit  sui- 
cide. 

Syawa,  v.  i.  Flash  (as  light- 
ning). 

Syanga,  v.  t.  {pmangatungd). 
To  peel  cocoa-nut. 

Sydva,  V.  {sdva).     Be  sony. 

Sydvunla,  v.  i.  Bathe  one's 
self  ;  rel.  conj.  ex.  joUunla. 

Sydzya,  or  Sdzya.  Complain ; 
talk  a  palaver. 

Sydzya,  v.  t.  To  gather  bam- 
boo leaves. 

SydkdUa,  v.  t.  Interrupt,  an- 
noy. 

Sydmhunla,  v.  t.  Hide  one's 
self;  I'ef.  conj.  ex.jamhunla, 

8yd  oa,  v.  t.     Peck. 

Sydva,  v.  i.     Escape  from. 

Sydria^  v.  t.  Allure,  entice, 
tempt. 

Sydnganla,  v.  i.  Be  cured ; 
made  whole  ;  get  well. 

Syekidia,  v.  t.  Indulge,  en- 
courage. 


50 


.MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Syeva,  v.  t.  {seva).     Plaj. 
Syenga^   v.   t.      Clear  out   (a 

road') ;  remove  obstructions. 
8yeng%nla^  v.  t.     Shave. 
Sy('ga,  v.  t.     Mimic, 
SyHia,  V,  t.  Laugh  at ;  deride. 
jSycsya,  v.  i.     To  lay  down  the 

head. 
/Syika,  V.  t.    To  catch  by  neck  ; 

to  choke. 
Syiha,    1.      Silver   (generally 

with  ya-pupu  and  sing.) 
8yiha-ya-tetda  teula .     G  old . 
Syllia,  V.  t.  Gaze  at ;  examine. 
/Syinga,  v.  i.     To  roar. 
Syhiya,  v.   t.      Stamp   (with 

foot). 
Sylza^  V.  t.     Be  bold. 
Sylsylla,  v.  n.     Disobedience. 
Syiiva,  V.     Cut  (bush). 
jSyira,   v.   t.     Whip   (with  a 

stick). 
Syiminla,  v,  i.     To  groan. 
Syoka,  V.  t.     Shake  up  ;  spill. 
/Syorasyoua,Sid.  In  abundance. 
jSyuga,  v.  t.     Shake,  distm-b, 

ti'ouble. 
Syugasugaga,  v.  t.     Shake. 
jSyi'/mbu,  1.  Lead  (the  mineral). 
Syusya,  v.   i.     Move  or  hitch 

along  (near  to  a  person). 
/Syuna,  v.  t.    Reveal  (a  secret). 
Syuria,  v.  t.     Convict ;  prove 

guilty. 
Siga,    V.    i.      Run   aground ; 

ground  (as  a  boat  in  shal- 
lows). 
/Sika,  1.     Silver,  money. 
Sikimia,  v.  t.    Ask,  or  inquire 

out  any  matter. 
Sila,  a.  V.     Disobedient,  and 

to  be  disobedient. 
Silina^  V.  t.  {silinla).     Go,  or 

act  contrary  ;  to  disobey. 


Simanla,  v.  i.,  e.  g.,  JcweBonga- 
nla.  Agree  together;  fit 
each  other. 

Siminla^  v.  i.     Groan. 

Simha^  V.  i.  To  land  at  a  place  ; 
by  the  way,  or  journey. 

Simhia,  v.  t.  Preserve,  up- 
hold. 

Shiga,  V.  t.     Dye,  color. 

Sifida,  a.  {isinda).     Cruel. 

Sindinla,  v.  t.     Endure,  bear." 

Sira,  V.  t.  Be  against ;  in  op- 
position to. 

Sini,  1.     Chemise,  petticoat. 

Siva,  V.  i.  Amount  to  ;  arrive 
at. 

Siza,  V.  t.     Rub,  scour. 

Sizinla,  v.  i.     To  scrape. 

Sodunla,  v.  t.     Bruise. 

Soga,  V.  t.  Mix  (liquid) ;  nV 
ezanga,  satu  rated . 

Soko,  V.  i.     Spill. 

SoJciza.     Causing  to  spill. 

Solia,  V.  t.     Go  under. 

Soliza,  V.  t.  Put,  or  place 
under. 

Somhia,  v.  t.     Command. 

Songa,  v.  t.     Follow. 

Syonlia,  v,  t.     Lower. 

Sopa,  V.  t.  To  clasp  and  hold 
in  the  arms. 

Sowa,  V.  t.     Bruise. 

Sua,  V.  t.  {swa).  To  cut  un- 
derbrush, grass,  etc. 

Sua,  V.  t.  To  snatch  (a  thing). 

Sula,  V.  i.  Come  to  an  end ; 
end. 

Suliza,  V.  t.  End,  finish,  de- 
stroy. 

Sufha,  V.  t.  Descend  (a  river) ; 
to  land. 

Sufhinlia,  V.  t.  Descend  from 
a  height. 

Suminlia,  \ .  t.     Praise. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


51 


Suna,  V.  t.  SuTi^  ogd  g' 
orjwanja  iv'oma,  sun'  ebd. 
To  make  known  privately  ; 
to  complain  to  the  king 
about  a  person, 

Sungakanlciy  v.  t.  Contend 
(by  words,  or  otherwise). 

Sunga,  v.  t.  Lend  money,  etc., 
to  be  restored  in  kind, 

Sunge,  ad.     Soon,  quickly, 

Su7ige^  ad.     In  a  little  time, 

Suna.     Pinch,  twinge. 

Simdiasundia,  v. 

Suria,  V,  t.  To  know  thor- 
oughly. 

Sunginla^  v.  t.     Save, 

Syavuzya,  v.  t.,  qx.  puga.  To 
cover  one's  self;  wrap  about. 

Sunja,  V.  t.  Tie  (a  bandage 
tight). 

/Syogwa,  v,  i.  To  boast,  glory, 
ex,  syogwa  nV  igumha 
ndakadie  esogwa  nV  igumha. 

Sogunlia^  v.  t.  Boast  against ; 
glory  over.     (Rom.  xi.  18). 

Syuga,  v.  t.  To  shake  ;  ex- 
cite, trouble. 

Syugazua,  v.  i.  Shake,  be- 
trouble. 

Swaka,  1.     Knife. 

Syusyunlia,  v.  t.  Together 
(as  the  skirt  of  dress). 

Swaswd,  ad.     Opposite,  above. 

Syoru7ila,  v.  t.  Take  off  (a 
garment). 

Syangwazyangwa,  e.  g.  sunga- 
hanla,  i.  e,,  dispute  about  a 
thing. 

Swena^  v.  t.     Snatch. 

Syamba^  v.  t.  To  hang  up, 
e.  g.,  a  curtain, 

Syangunla,  v.  t.    To  embrace. 

Syawunla,  v.  i.  Shine  bright- 
ly- 


Syozua,  V.  i.  Dissolve  (soap 
in  water). 

T. 

Tavi.  Play  the  game  ntyange. 

Ta,  V.  t.  iinhanlo).  lielate 
legends. 

Ta,  V.  t.     Sting,  hurt. 

Taga,  v.  t.  Choke  (as  weeds 
corn). 

Taganla.  To  become  en- 
tangled. 

Tahilia,  v.  t.     Tell,  inform. 

Taho,  1,     Tobacco. 

Tala,  V.  t.     Make  clay  floor. 

Talua,  V.  t.  Quit,  leave  (farm). 

Talia,  v.  t.     Put,  lay  upon, 

Tamla,  v.  t.  Hunt  clams  and 
fish  left  in  holes  by  the  tide. 

Tanga,  v.  t.  Swear ;  make 
oath. 

Tanga,  v.  t.     Count,  think. 

Tandua,  v.  i.  Rip  (as  sewing). 

Tandunla,  v.  t. 

Tanda,  v.  i.  Dodge  about 
(when  pursued). 

Tanda.  To  be  tame,  not 
easily  frightened. 

Tangunla,  v.  t.     Read. 

Tanla.  v. )  rn    i 

Tanlia.    .(  ^^  ^^  ^^^"•>^- 

Tara,  v.     To  keep  ;  withhold. 

Tata,  1.  Father,  a  term  of 
respect. 

Tataminla,  v.  i.     Tremble. 

Tava,  V.  t.  Cut  to  pieces ; 
rip  apart ;  draw  out. 

Twa,  V.  i.     Alter,  change. 

Tavinla,  v.  t.  Pay  a  tine ;  ex- 
piate a  crime. 

Tavoro,  1.     A  table. 

Tada,  v,  i.  Part  (as  a  rope) ; 
break  in  two. 


52 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Tavunla^  v.  t.  Take  off  or 
away  a  vessel  from  the  fire. 

Td,  aiix.  V.  Used  with  pot. 
imp.     Could,  would. 

Ta,  2i<\vevh  verb.     Rather. 

Tata,  def.  v.  or  int.     Oh  that ! 

Tata,  a.  He  is  better  (in  sick- 
ness only). 

Tdmia,  v.  t.     Prefer,  choose. 

Tdmd,  V.  t.     Own,  to  adopt. 

Tdma,  V.  t.     Espouse. 

Tdva,  V.  t.  Insult  (with  words). 

Tengnnla,  v.  t.  Cause  to 
kneel,  distort,  careen. 

Tegwa,  v.  i.  Tip  down  (as 
boat) ;  err ;  go  wrong,  kneel, 
or  careen. 

Tela,  V.  t.     Spy  out. 

Telanganla,  v.  i.  and  a. 
Across ;  go  across. 

Tennsa,  v,  t.  Deceive,  befool. 

Tenlatenla,  a.  Red,  yellow, 
brown. 

Tenia,  v.  t.  Cut  with  any 
sharp  iustrument. 

Tenia,  v.  i.     Sit  up  at  night. 

Tenliza,  v.  t.  Settle,  decide 
(a  dispute). 

Tendia,  v.  t.  Avoid ;  turn 
away. 

Ten  da,  v.  t.  Write,  engrave, 
inscribe. 

Tendinla,  v.  i.  Cause  to  write 
to  any  one. 

Teria,  v.  t.     Frighten. 

Teva,  V.  t.     Show. 

Tevunla,  v.  t.  Reprove,  in- 
struct, correct  (with  words). 

TegejTia,  v.  t.     Covet. 

Telarela,  v.  To  go  frequently 
between  places. 

Tele,  a.     Kaked. 

Tengunla,  v.  i.     Limp. 

Teta,  V.  t.     Say,  speak. 


Tetevenld,  ad.  [gotetevenla) . 
Just  now. 

Tevenld,  ad.  {gotevenld).  Just 
now ;  just. 

Teva,  V,  t.     Hatch,  crack. 

Tevia,  V.  i.  Be,  or  become 
wet. 

Tl've,  a.     Wet. 

Teoiza,  V.  t.     Wet. 

Tia,  V.  i.     Fear. 

Tiaganla,  rel.  couj.  To  fear 
each  other. 

Tiena,  v.  t.     Distrust. 

Tieza,  v.  t.     Frighten. 

Tiga,  v.  t.     Stop,  cease,  leave. 

Tiganla.  v.  i.  Be  left ;  stay 
behind. 

Timhiarimbia,  v.  i.     Stagger. 

Tim,  V.  i.  To  be  permeated 
with  (bread  with  leaven). 

Toa,  V.  i.     Go,  be,  become. 

Toanla,  v.  t.     Carry. 

Toanliza,  v.  t.  Send  (by  an- 
other) ;  cause  one  to  carry  ; 
to  load  a  person. 

Toazango,  ad.,  e.  g.,  vendetua. 
Perhaps ;  if  perhaps. 

Todunla,  v.  t.  Pull  up ;  not 
np  ;  eradicate. 

Togora,  v.  t.     Perspire. 

Toka,  V.  t.,  e.  g.  tumba.    Dig. 

Tokxmla,  v.  t.  Dig  ;  gouge ; 
pluck  out  (as  things). 

Tola,y.\.  Be  well ;  get  well; 
be  in  comfortable  circum- 
stances. 

Toliza,  V.  t.  Cure  (from  dan- 
ger) ;  rescue  ;  bestow  favors. 

T^a,  V.  t.  Break  through  (a 
fence). 

Toliza,  V.  t.  Make  a  hole 
through. 

Tolongo,  1.     Trunk. 

Tolu,  1.     Towel. 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


Toma^  V,  t.     Send. 
Tofhinlia,  v.  t.     Order;  send 

for  (a  thing). 
Tomha,    v.    t.      Take   away ; 

throw  away  ;  subtract. 
Tomhare  jpa.  Except,  besides. 
Tomhinla,    v.    t.      Take    up 

away  (stretch  out  or  up  the 

the  arm). 
Tonga,   v.    t.      Speak    loud ; 

hallo,  yell,  bellow. 
Tongwa,  v.  i.     Kise  (from  the 

dead). 
Tongunlia,  v.  t.  .  Raise  (from 

the  dead). 
Tora^    V.   t.      ftemove    (one's 

effects  or  town)  from  a  place. 
Tova,  V.  t.     Yomit, 
Tova,   V.   i.     Be,   or  becoiyie 

mouldy. 
Tonda,  or  tdnda,  v.  t.     Love. 
Tondanla,  ov  tdndanla,  v.  i. 

Love  each  other. 
Tondia,     or    tdndia,     v.  '  t. 

Flease,  delight. 
Tondlza,    or    tdyidiza,    v.    t. 

Cause  to  love. 
Tonginla,    or  tdnginla,  v.  t. 

Lust   after;    desire  (in   bad 

sense). 
Tongiva,  or  tbngwa,  v.  i.  Eise 

(as  sun). 
Tua,  a.     Sharp. 
Tuenlia,y.t.  Spit;  spit  upon. 
Tuenla.  '     Be  ;    become  ;    be 

fultilled. 
Txiga,  V.  t.  Turn  (one's  self) ; 

tuge  nyuma. 
Tuga,  V.  t.      Abuse,  oppress  ; 

tug''  osyaka. 
Tugwa,  v.  i.    Be  blown  down  ; 

fall  (as  a  house). 
Tukia,  V.  t.     Bruise. 
TuTcway  V.  i.     Be  bruised. 


Tida,  V.  i.     To  kick  about,  as 

tortus  in  utero. 
Tula,  V.  t.     Pulveiize  ;  pound 

(with  pestle). 
Tid''  agovi.   To  slap  the  hands 

together  in  astonishment. 
Tula,  V.  i.    Be,  or  become  dull. 
Tuma,   V.   t.     Piei'ce,   spear, 

sew. 
Tumba,    v.   t.      Dig  (in    the 

ground). 
Tumhakanla,  v. 
Tuminlia,  v.  t.     Point   out ; 

show  ;  aim. 
Tumunla,    v.   t.      To   dig    a 

sluice. 
Tunla,  Y.    t.      To   do  black- 
smithing. 
Tunla,  V.  i.   {tuna).     Be,    or 

become  short. 
Tunlisa,     or     ticnlia,     v.     t. 

Shorten. 
Turinlia,  v.  i.     To  shrink  (as 

cloth). 
Tute,  1.     Two  fathoms  (four 

yards  cloth). 
Tuta,  V.  t.     Present,  give. 
Tuwa,  V.  t.     Burst. 
Tuioa,  V.  t.    To  accuse  f^dsely ; 

slander. 
Tuwunla,   v.  i.     Spring   up ; 

grow  .(as  planted  seeds). 
Tuezinla,  v.  t.     Drip. 
Tyunazunaga,  v.  t.     {ntyun- 

azanaga).      Deal  out  spar- 
ingly. 

V. 

vanganle,  conj.  Through  ; 
even  yet. 

Vange,  ad.     After  that. 

vanij  ad.  {venli).     Where? 

vd,  prep.  At ;  in  ;  for ;  on  ac- 
count of. 


54 


MPONGWE   DICTIONARY. 


vdUvenld,  ad.     Jnst  now. 

vdvd,  ad.     There. 

vdte,  ad,    Jnst  now  ;  go-te  and 

yotHevenld. 
'vdvdme,  ad.     At  that  time. 
vengevenge.    Smiling,  pleased. 
venli,    a.     Where    (prigi    so 

venli  f) 
venld,  ad.    Here,  now. 
veiide,  ad.     Lest. 
vendetua,  ad.     Perhaps. 
verevere,  a.   Low. 
vevele,  a.     Smooth,  level. 
■vi,  ad.     Entirely  out  (of  fire, 

light,  etc.) 
via.  Finished,  done  (with  nli). 
viaganlo,  ad.     More. 
vidvid,  a.     Black. 
vinte.,  1.     A  cent. 
vingovingo,  ad.     Around. 
volovolo,  ad.     All  round. 


vonde^  con. 
vondo,  con. " 


If  only  as  preceding 
correllating  kupondo. 
e.  g.  vondo  ezazinld 
kd  poro  mezA,  if  this 
thing  much  more 
than  tliat. 


w. 

Wami^  1. ;  pi.  awmila.    Mj 
children. 


Wdnld.,  a.     Oma. 
Wenli.     On  lome. 
WolanganlanyamMe,  ad.     In- 
discriminately. 


Yantyd^  ].     Small  quantity. 
Yawa7ila,  1«    Little  (boys  or 

girls). 
Ydnld,    dem.     pron.       That 

(mostly  prefixed  by  mi?). 
Yakd,  ad.     Continually. 
Yeydifia.        Some      (pi.      of 

oijwdzdma). 
Ye?ild,  ad.     So,  thus. 
T^,  int.   pron.     Which  (of  a 

number). 
Yinld,  dem.  pron.     Thus. 


Zange,  a.     Open  (as  a  door). 
Zima,  a.    Grave,  serious  ;  (op- 
posite to  orogd). 
Zoli,  prep.     Under. 
Zoioa,  a.     Strait,  narrow. 
Zoge,  a.     Squatted  down. 
Zuere,  ad.     Used  with  nhei. 
Zyele^  du.     Is  not  at  all. 
Zyele.,  v.  def .     Is  not. 


4^ 


^       U-r^'  /^ 


^-i^^-C-^y 


u 


'l^iyu-     ^i 


<^-- 


a 


fH>6 


o 


,c 


A'  y^i^  y'l^  /  f  -  /  /L  I  /    7 


I'C'ydLr,     ~ 


/J       ■  /^_  -  ^l  ^A^x — »  0 


(£> 


I 


r 


oc. 


rh-^^Z 


4^  . 


( 


■*i .. .Lv 


/ 


